1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. B051
  6. Service manual

Ricoh B051 Service Manual

Ricoh mfp service manual
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B051/B052
SERVICE MANUAL
001488MIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh B051

Summary of Contents for Ricoh B051

  • Page 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B051/B052 SERVICE MANUAL 001488MIU RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ® ® RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 5: B051/B052

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B051/B052 SERVICE MANUAL 001488MIU CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
  • Page 8 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 9 Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing...
  • Page 10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 11 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B051 DSc224 LD024c Aficio 1224C C2408 B052 DSc232 LD032c Aficio 1232C C3210 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 02/2003 Original Printing CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............1-1 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ................1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................1-1 1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............1-2 1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS..............1-2 1.2 COPIER (B051/B052)................1-3 1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........1-3 1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ............1-4 1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK..............1-5 1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............1-6 1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)..............1-13 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..............1-13...
  • Page 14 Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment.............3-17 3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD ........3-18 3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ................3-19 3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ............3-20 3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY................3-20 3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ............3-21 3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER.....3-22 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 15 3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ............3-48 3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ................3-48 3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX ................3-49 3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ..............3-49 3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 ............3-50 3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR..............3-50 3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2 ............3-51 3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ............3-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 16 SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result ........4-20 SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result ..........4-20 4.3.4 GAVD TEST ...................4-20 4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ..........4-21 4.4.1 SENSORS ..................4-21 4.4.2 SWITCHES..................4-23 4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ............4-23 4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS.....................4-24 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 17 Using a Flash Memory Card ...............5-80 Without Using a Flash Memory Card ..........5-81 5.1.10 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) ..........5-82 5.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ................5-83 5.2.1 FIRMWARE ..................5-83 5.2.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..........5-84 Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ............5-84 Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) ..........5-85 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 18 Supplementary Information on Process Control .........6-17 6.5 SCANNING....................6-19 6.5.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-19 6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ................6-20 Book Mode..................6-20 ARDF Mode ..................6-20 6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION............6-21 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ................6-23 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-23 6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM ..............6-24 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 19 Set Switch and Full Sensor..............6-39 Contact Mechanism ................6-40 Power Supply..................6-41 Drive ....................6-41 6.8 LASER EXPOSURE................6-42 6.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-42 6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT..........6-43 Speed ....................6-43 6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR ..........6-43 6.8.4 LD UNIT..................6-43 6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH ..............6-44 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 20 6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-58 Jammed Paper Release ..............6-58 Image Transfer and Paper Separation..........6-58 6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM ........6-59 Timing ....................6-59 Mechanism ..................6-59 6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY .................6-60 Circuit....................6-60 Paper Transfer Roller Bias..............6-60 Discharge Plate ..................6-60 Temperature/Humidity Control............6-60 Roller Cleaning ...................6-61 B051/B052 viii CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 21 Bridge Unit ....................7-5 By-pass Tray Unit .................7-6 Duplex Unit ...................7-6 Interchange Unit ...................7-6 LCT .......................7-7 Paper Tray Unit..................7-7 Shift Tray Unit ..................7-7 1-Bin Tray Unit ..................78 500-Sheet Finisher................7-8 1000-sheet Finisher ................7-9 Upper Tray....................7-9 Lower Tray....................7-9 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 22: Paper Tray Unit B456

    1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480 SEE SECTION B480 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510 SEE SECTION B510 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490 SEE SECTION B490 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 23: 500-Sheet Finisher B458

    SEE SECTION B509 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BRIDGE UNIT B482 SEE SECTION B482 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 SEE SECTION B408 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 500-SHEET FINISHER B458 SEE SECTION B458 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 25: Important Safety Notices

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3.

  • Page 26: Laser Safety

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LASER SAFETY The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer.
  • Page 27 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Trademarks ® ® ® Microsoft , Windows , and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. PostScript ® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. ® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. ®...
  • Page 28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 29: Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INSTALLATION AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B386 FAX UNIT B502 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PAPER TRAY UNIT B456 PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLER B463/B529 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457 TROUBLESHOOTING 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 500-SHEET FINISHER B458 SERVICE TABLES INTERCHANGE UNIT B481 DUPLEX UNIT B509 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS BYPASS TRAY UNIT B490...
  • Page 30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 31: Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INSTALLATION CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 33: Installation Requirements

    9. Install the machine on a strong, level base. 10. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration. 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 34: Power Requirements

    2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10% 3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord. 1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A: Over 100 mm (4") B: Over 100 mm (4") C: Over 550 mm (22") D: Over 750 mm (29.6") B051I126.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 35: Copier (B051/B052)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2 COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS  CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals. Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets. 1. ADF 2. Finisher 1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max.

  • Page 36: Installation Flow Chart

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently. Unpack the copier Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher? Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT...

  • Page 37: Accessory Check

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list: Description Q’ty Paper Tray Decal Model Name Decal NECR Factory Data Sheet Filter Duct Filter Caution Decal – Power/Paper Decal –...

  • Page 38: Installation Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B051I101.WMF B051I138.WMF B051I125.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT will be installed at the same time, place the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and the other options.
  • Page 39 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) B051I110.WMF B051I124.WMF B051I134.WMF 3. Open the right cover [A], and remove the red tags [B]. 4. Open the left cover [C] ( x 2), and remove the red tags [D]. 5. Pull out all development units [E] ( x 1 each).
  • Page 40 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) B051I133.WMF 6. Peel off the toner cartridge seal [A]. 7. Reinstall the toner cartridge in the development unit. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 41 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) B051I133.WMF Rear view B051I409.WMF 8. Keep the development unit level and shake the development unit about 10 times from side to side. NOTE: 1) Do not touch the development roller or the development roller gear.
  • Page 42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) B051I135.WMF 11. Reinstall the development units, and close the left cover. NOTE: A white line or band may appear on one end of the paper if a development unit is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the development unit partially (about 30 mm) and slowly reinstall it.
  • Page 43 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) B051I137.WMF B051I131.WMF B051I128.WMF 13. Install the filters [A] and ducts [B] as shown. 14. Attach the appropriate model name decal [C] to the front cover. 15. Pull the paper tray out, and adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
  • Page 44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) Rev. 04/2003 B051I129.WMF 17. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A] out. 18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover (see ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).

  • Page 45: Paper Tray Unit (B456)

    Securing Bracket Front Stand Rear Stand Screw - M4x10 Knob Screw Stepped Screw B456I001.WMF 1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B456I002.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape. 1-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 46 2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the paper tray unit and remove the shipping retainers. 3. Install the front stand [B] ( x 2). 4. Install the rear stand [C]. 5. Attach two stand brackets [D] ( x 1 each). B051/B052 1-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 47 7. Remove the paper trays [C] from the copier and secure the paper tray unit ( x 2). 8. Attach a securing bracket [D] to each side of the paper tray unit ( x 1 each). 1-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 48 NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main copier. 10. Load paper into the paper trays. 11. Turn on the main switch. 12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality. B051/B052 1-16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 49: Lct (B457)

    Securing Bracket Front Stand Rear Stand Screw - M4x10 Knob Screw Stepped Screw B457I151.WMF 1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B457I001.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape. 1-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 50 2. While pressing the stopper [A] attached to the guide rail, pull out the large capacity tray [B]. 3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2). 4. Install the rear stand [D]. 5. Attach two stand brackets [E] ( x 1 each). B051/B052 1-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 51 6. Set the copier [A] on the LCT [B]. 7. Remove the paper trays [C] from the copier and secure the LCT ( x 2). 8. Attach a securing bracket [D] to each side of the LCT ( x 1 each). 1-19 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 52 NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main copier. 10. Load paper into the LCT. 11. Turn on the main switch. 12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality. B051/B052 1-20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 53: Auto Reverse Document Feeder (B386)

    DF Exposure Glass Stud Screw Knob Screw Original Size Decal Screwdriver Tool B386I500.WMF 1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B386I101.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape. 1-21 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 54 6. Install two stud screws [G]. 7. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown. 8. Secure the DF unit with two screws [H]. 9. Connect the cable [I] to the copier. B051/B052 1-22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 55 15. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (refer to Replacements and Adjustments – Copy Adjustments). 1-23 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 56: Interchange Unit (B481)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) 1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Interchange Unit B481I101.WMF B051/B052 1-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 57: Installation Procedure

    This harness is not used in this procedure, but is used when installing another option. 7. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [F]. 8. Reinstall the connector cover [G] which was removed in step 4. 1-25 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 58: 1-Bin Tray Unit (B480)

    1.7.1 ACCESORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1-Bin Tray Unit Tray Sub-Tray Tray Guide Shield Mylar Sub Paper Guide Paper Guide Tapping Screw M3x8 B480I101.WMF B051/B052 1-26 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 59: Installation Procedure

    1. Remove all tapes. 2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover [A] of the bridge unit. If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step. 1-27 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 60 4. If the front right cover [B] is installed, remove it ( x 1). 5. Remove the cover [C]. 6. Disconnect the connector [D] and remove the LED board [E]. 7. Install the 1-bin tray unit [F] ( x 1). B051/B052 1-28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 61 [D]. Then attach the sub paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown. 12. Install the tray guide [E]. 13. Install the tray [F]. 14. Install the sub-tray [G]. 15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation. 1-29 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 62: Shift Tray

    1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page). 2. Remove the covers [A] ( x 1). 3. Replace screw [B] with a stepped screw [C]. 4. Install the large paper guide [D] and two small paper guides [E]. B051/B052 1-30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 63 6. Pass the harnesses [B] through the opening [C], and install the shift tray unit [D], as shown. NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw. 2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guides [E] installed in step 4. 1-31 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SHIFT TRAY B510I104.WMF 7. Connect the harnesses [A], as shown. 8. Turn on the main power switch. 9. Check the shift tray operation. B051/B052 1-32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 65: By-Pass Feed Unit (B490)

    1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B490I113.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page). 2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (x 2). 1-33 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 66 3. Install the by-pass tray unit [A] ( x 3,  x 1). 4. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function. 5. Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration. B051/B052 1-34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 67: Duplex Unit (B509)

    1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Duplex Unit Upper Bracket Rear Holder Bracket Front Holder Bracket Clip Tapping Screw - M4x6 Tapping Screw - M3x6 B509I101.WMF 1-35 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 68: Installation Procedure

    NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B481) must be installed. 1. Remove all tapes (see the previous page). 2. Remove five covers [A] ( x 1). 3. Install three brackets [B] ( x 1 each - M4x6). B051/B052 1-36 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 69 6. Remove the connector cover [E] ( x 1). 7. Connect the cable [F] and secure the grounding wire [G] ( x 1). 8. Install the connector cover. 9. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function. 1-37 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 70: Bridge Unit (B482)

    B482I101.WMF 1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE B482I500.WMF  CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove all tapes. 2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it away into the machine. B051/B052 1-38 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 71 4. Remove two covers [B] ( x 1 each). 5. Remove the rear cover [C] ( x 2). 6. Pass the harnesses [D] through the opening [E], and install the bridge unit [F] ( x 2). 7. Reinstall the front right cover. 1-39 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 72 10. When the 1,000-sheet finisher (Machine code: B408) will be installed, attach the front joint bracket [B] and rear joint bracket [C] ( x 2 each). 11. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure). B051/B052 1-40 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 73: 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

    1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) 1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) 1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty B022/B027/B031 B051/B052 Front Joint Bracket Rear Joint Bracket Grounding Plate Copy Tray Staple Position Decal Screw - M4x17...
  • Page 74 NOTE: The following options must be installed before installing this finisher. - Bridge Unit (B482) - Paper Tray Unit (B456) or LCT (B457) Also, the optional adjustment table (B488) is required. 1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes. B051/B052 1-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 75 7. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw - M3x8) and close the front door. 8. Install the copy tray [F] (1 knob screw - M4x10). 9. Connect the finisher cable [G] to the main machine. 1-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 76 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) B408I501.WMF 10. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown. 11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation. B051/B052 1-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 77 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) 1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) 1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Unit Holder Entrance Guide Shift Tray Snap Ring Knob Screw B458I102.WMF 1-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 78 (B482) must be installed. 1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes. 2. Install the entrance guide [A]. 3. Remove the holder cover [B]. Then install the unit holder [C] (2 screws). 4. Re-install the holder cover [B]. B051/B052 1-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 79 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) B458I104.WMF B458I105.WMF 5. Install the 500-sheet finisher [A] ( x 1). 6. Install the output tray [B] as shown (2 snap rings). 7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation. 1-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 80: Platen Cover Installation

    2. Peel off the platen sheet [B] and place it on the exposure glass. 3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [C] on the exposure glass. 4. Gently close the platen cover. B051/B052 1-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 81: Memory

    4. Remove the BICU cover [D] ( x 16). 5. Remove the HDD connector cover [E] ( x 4). 6. Disconnect two HDD harnesses [F]. 7. Remove the controller board cover [G] ( x 7). 1-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 82 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MEMORY B051I308.WMF 8. Install the memory DIMM [A] on the controller board. 9. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover. B051/B052 1-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 83: Key Counter Installation

    2. Remove the upper right cover [B] ( x 1). 3. Remove the cap [C]. 4. Install the bracket [D] ( x 2). ⇒ 5. Connect the cable [E] to the EX I/O board CN 379 and route it as shown. 1-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 84 1. Connect the cable [F]. 10. Hook the key counter holder assembly [G] onto the stepped screw and secure it ( x 1). 11. The restricted access control for the key counter is enabled by the Copier UP mode. B051/B052 1-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 85: Anti-Condensation Heater

    NOTE: When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is positioned at the rear left corner, as shown. 2. Install the anti-condensation heater [E] ( x 2,  x 1). 3. Reinstall the exposure glass and the scales. 1-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 86: Tray Heater

    2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays. 3. Pass the connector [B] through the opening [C]. 4. Install the tray heater assembly [D] ( x 1). 5. Connect the heater cable to the ac cable [E]. 6. Reassemble the machine. B051/B052 1-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 87: Tray Heater (Optional Paper Tray Unit)

    3. Remove the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit [C] ( x 2). 4. Slide out the paper trays from the optional paper tray unit. 5. Pass the connector [D] through the opening [E]. 6. Install the tray heater [F] ( x 1). 1-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 88 7. Remove the oil bottle [A] and the oil bottle bracket [B] ( x 3). 8. Install the clamp [C]. 9. Connect the cable [D] to the heater cable [E] and the PSU [F]. Then clamp the cable. 10. Reinstall the rear covers. B051/B052 1-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 89: Tray Heater (Optional Lct)

    3. Remove the rear cover for the optional LCT [C] ( x 2). 4. Slide out the paper tray [D] from the optional LCT. 5. Push stopper [E] on the right slide rail and remove the paper tray. 1-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 90 8. Remove the oil bottle [D] and the oil bottle bracket [E] ( x 3). 9. Install the clamp [F]. 10. Connect the cable [G] to the heater cable [H] and the PSU [I]. Then clamp the cable. 11. Reinstall the rear covers. B051/B052 1-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 91: Preventive Maintenance

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 92 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 93: Main Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MAIN UNIT 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2.1 MAIN UNIT 2.1.1 OVERVIEW Oil supply unit Fusing subunit Charge corona unit B051P112.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 94: Pm Table

    Charge Corona Grid Charge Corona Cleaner Development Unit Prints Developments Remarks 120K 120K 240K Development unit-C Refer to the PM counter for each unit Development unit-M (Not reclaimed at the Development unit-Y reclamation center) Development unit-K B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 95 Rear oil tank absorber Fusing cover absorber Oil supply roller Oiling roller Pressure cleaning roller Fusing belt unit Pressure roller Pressure roller strippers Idle gear – 28Z/35Z Gear – 47Z Front spring plate Rear spring plate B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 96 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MAIN UNIT Filters Prints Developments Remarks 120K 120K 240K Exhaust filters Ozone filter By-pass Tray Unit Prints Developments Remarks 120K 120K 240K Feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller Friction pad Damp cloth B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 97: Optional Unit Pm Table

    Damp/dry cloth Platen cover Damp/dry cloth Paper Tray Unit Prints Developments Remarks 120K 120K 240K Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Large Capacity Tray Prints Developments Remarks 120K 120K 240K Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 98 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 99: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 100 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 101: Special Tools

    C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 3.2 FILTERS 1. Filter covers [B, D, and E] 2. Exhaust filters [A, C, G, and I] 3. Filter holder [F] 4. Ozone filter [H] B051R819.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 102: Scanner Unit

    1. Exposure glass (! 3.3.1) 2. Original length sensor 1 [A] ( x 1,  x 1) 3. Original length sensor 2 [B] ( x 1,  x 1) 4. Original width sensor [C] ( x 1,  x1) B051R003.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 103: Lens Block Assembly

    • Before inputting the number, check whether it is + or – (look at the data sheet), then input a +ve or –ve number accordingly. 7. Check the registrations (! SP4-010/011 Chapter 3, Copy adjustments) NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level (! 3.14). B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 104 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER UNIT B051S999.PCX B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 105: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    4. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 1) 5. Scanner left cover [C] ( x 1) 6. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1) B051R002.WMF 7. Left frame [E] ( x 2) 8. Front frame [F] ( x 5) B051R009.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 106 Reassembling 1. Take up the cable slack. NOTE: Make sure the cable is not dangling and the wires are not crossed. 2. Adjust the cable clamp position [F] if necessary. NOTE: Do not open the clamp. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 107: Scanner I/O Board

    (! Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire). 3. Front scanner wire clamp [A] 4. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) 5. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1) B051R943.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 108 7. Insert the ball end into the slit [F], with the end going via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and the rear track of the movable pulley [H]. B051R945.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 109 NOTE: 1) After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 10 through 15. 2) After replacing the carriage, adjust the scanner white level (! 3.14). B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 110: Rear Scanner Wire

    7. Rear scanner wire clamp [C] 8. Rear scanner wire bracket [D] ( x 1) 9. Scanner motor gear [E] ( x 1) 10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [F] ( x 1) B051R949.WMF B051/B052 3-10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 111 NOTE: Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet. 7. Install the wire. NOTE: The winding pattern is a mirror image of that of the front scanner wire. 8. Perform steps 10 through 15 in “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”. 3-11 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 112: Laser Unit

    This printer uses a class-1 laser beam with a wavelength of 650 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury. B051/B052 3-12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 113: Laser Unit

    3. Lower rear cover [C] ( x 2) B051R101.WMF 4. Fan [D] ( x 5) 5. BICU cover [E] ( x 11) B051R924.WMF 6. Flat cable [F] 7. LD unit cables [G] ( x 2) B051R102.WMF 3-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 114 13. Open the front cover. 14. Dust shield glass cleaner lever [F] NOTE: The dust shield glass cleaner lever is the blue lever at the left side of the charge corona unit (! 3.6.3). B051R909.WMF B051/B052 3-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 115: Adjusting For Image Skew

    NOTE: When the image skews as shown on the right, move the unit 1 mm in the direction of the black arrow as shown in the diagram above and to the right. Paper feed (A3 SEF) B051R901.WMF 3-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 116: D-Phase Adjustment

    2.1 ∼ 3.5 ∼ 5. Print out the test pattern with SP5- 4.9 ∼ 955-6. 6.3 ∼ 7.7 ∼ 6. Check if vertical black stripes can 9.1 ∼ 10.4 be seen. 10.5 ∼ 11.8 Table 1 B051/B052 3-16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 117: Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment

    3. To adjust the laser beam pitch, tighten or loosen the screw [A] on the LD unit holder. 4. Print out the test pattern with SP5-955-1. 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the black stripes disappear (Figure 2). B051R820.WMF 3-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 118 B051R904.WMF 3. Polygonal mirror motor [B] ( x 1,  x 4) NOTE: Do not touch the mirror surface. 4. Laser Synch. Detection board (LSD) [C] ( x 1,  x 1) B051R905.WMF B051/B052 3-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 119: Development Unit

    NOTE: A white line or band may appear on one end of the B051I407.WMF paper if a development is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the development unit partially (about 30 mm) [D] and slowly reinstall it. 3-19 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 120: Photoconductor Unit (Pcu)

    1. Open the front cover [A]. 2. Open the right cover [B]. 3. Pull the unit out of the machine ( x 3). 4. Grasp the brown and green grips. 5. Lift the unit and remove it. B051/B052 3-20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 121: Waste Toner Bottles

    T/B waste toner. Dispose of the O/B waste toner whenever you work on the machine. B051R204.WMF Toner Disposal 1) Remove the cap [C]. 2) Dispose of the toner according to local regulations. B051R212.WMF 3-21 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 122: Charge Corona Unit, Grid, Wire, And Cleaner

    3. Front bracket ( x 1) [D] 4. Grid [E] 5. Rear bracket [F] B051R207.WMF 6. Front wire cover [G] 7. Rear wire cover [H] 8. Wire cleaner [I] 9. Unhook the corona wire [J]. B051R209.WMF B051/B052 3-22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 123: Charge Corona Wire Cleaner Motor

    NOTE: Hold up the photoconductor unit while removing the OPC belt B051R915.WMF cleaning unit. 3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT 1. Photoconductor unit (! 3.6.1) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 2) 3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit [B] B051R919.WMF 3-23 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 124: Paper Transfer Unit

    3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER 1. Brace [A] ( x 1) 2. Guide [B] NOTE: To remove the screws, turn the roller unit on its pivot. 3. Transfer roller [C] x 2, Bushing x 2, Bearing x 2) B051R403.WMF B051/B052 3-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 125: Fusing/Paper Exit

    NOTE: Do not touch the oiling felt. NOTE: When reassembling, install the oil supply unit, remove the cap from the oil supply B051R501.WMF opening, wipe the cap and the cap holder [E] with waste, and put it on the holder. 3-25 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 126: Oil Supply Pad

    3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER 1. Oil supply unit (! 3.8.2) 2. Cleaning roller [A] (Bushing x 2,  x 3. Fusing sponge roller [B] (Bushing x 2,  x 2, Spring x 2) B051R504.WMF B051/B052 3-26 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 127: Oiling Roller And Oil Supply Roller

    3. Oil supply roller [A] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2) 4. Oiling roller [B] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2) NOTE: The bushings on the oiling roller [C] are different from those on the oil supply roller [D]. 3-27 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 128: Fusing Lamps

    B051R510.WMF 4. Pull out the lamp (350W) [C] ( x 5. Pull out the lamp (770W) [D] ( x 2, Cable x 1). NOTE: “350W” and “770W” are printed on the respective terminals. B051R954.WMF B051R950.WMF B051/B052 3-28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 129: Fusing Inner Unit

    3. Hot roller lamp harness terminal [B] ( x 1) 4. Fusing inner unit [C] ( x 2,  x 3) B051R512.WMF 3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE 1. Fusing inner unit (! 3.8.7) 2. Pressure roller thermofuse [A] ( x 2) B051R958.WMF 3-29 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 130: Hot Roller Strippers

    4. Confirm that the pawl moves correctly. 3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT 1. Fusing inner unit (! 3.8.7) 2. Springs [A] [B] 3. Separate the fusing belt unit [C] and the pressure roller unit [D]. B051R513.WMF B051/B052 3-30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 131: Pressure Roller, Pressure Roller Gear, And Cleaning Roller

    2. Gear [A] 3. Spring [B] ( x 1) 4. Hot roller stripper assembly [C] ( x 2) 5. Front bracket [D] ( x 1) 6. Bearing [E] 7. Pressure roller [F] 8. Cleaning roller [G] 3-31 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 132: Pressure Roller Thermistor

    FUSING/PAPER EXIT 3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR B051R514.WMF 1. Pressure roller unit (! 3.8.9) 2. Pressure roller lower stay [A] ( x 2) 3. Pressure roller thermistor holder [B] ( x 1) 4. Pressure roller thermistor [C] B051/B052 3-32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 133: Oil Absorbers

    7. Absorber holder [E] ( x 1) 8. Absorber 3 [F] 9. Spring [G] 10. Base bracket [H] ( x 2) 11. Absorber holder [I] ( x 1) 12. Absorber 4 [J] 13. Absorber 5 [K] 14. Absorber 6 [L] 3-33 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 134: Paper Exit/Overflow Sensors

    1. Open the right cover [A] 2. Upper right cover [B] B051R509.WMF 3. Open the front cover [C]. 4. Upper front cover [D] ( x 1) 5. Paper exit upper cover [E] B051R922.WMF B051/B052 3-34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 135 NOTE: Remove 2 connectors before removing the unit. To remove the last connector, remove the unit and turn it over. The connector is on the bottom. 9. Paper exit sensor [D] 10. Paper overflow sensor [E] B051R508.WMF 3-35 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 136: Paper Feed And Transport

    3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD 1. Paper trays [A] B051R601.WMF 2. Slide out the shaft [B] ( x 1). 3. Feed roller [C] (1 hook) 4. Friction pad [D] (2 hooks) B051R952.WMF B051/B052 3-36 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 137: Registration Sensor

    8. Open the left inner cover door [C]. 9. Left inner cover [D] ( x 2) 10. Right inner cover [E] ( x 3) NOTE: Pull out the PCU when removing the right inner cover. B051R603.WMF 3-37 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 138 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 11. Rear right cover [A] ( x 6) B051R604.WMF 12. Bracket [B] ( x 3) 13. Open the controller box [C] ( x 1,  x 6) B051R605.WMF B051/B052 3-38 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 139 19. While releasing the wire, remove the transport stay [E] ( x 2). NOTE: You can see the wire clip from the rear of the machine. 20. Registration sensor [F] ( x 1,  x 1) B051R608.WMF 3-39 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 140: Paper Feed Sensor 1

    B051R609.WMF 3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS 1. Transport stay (! 3.9.2) 2. Feeler [A] 3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1) 4. Paper near-end sensor [C] ( x 1 each) B051R610.WMF B051/B052 3-40 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 141: Paper Feed Sensor 2

    4. Vertical transport clutch [B] ( x 1) 5. Bushing [C] ( x 1) B051R612.WMF 6. Roller unit [D] ( x 1,  x 2) B051R613.WMF 7. Roller bracket [E] ( x 1, Bushing x 8. Paper feed sensor 2 [F] B051R614.WMF 3-41 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 142: Paper End Sensor 1

    4. Paper end sensor 1 [C] ( x 1) B051R611.WMF 3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2 1. Transport stay (! 3.9.2) 2. Lower the feeler [A]. 3. Paper end sensor 2 [B] ( x 1) B051R615.WMF B051/B052 3-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 143: Electrical Components

    3) 6. I/O board [E] ( x 29, x 4) B051R801.WMF 3.10.2 EX I/O BOARD ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1) 2. Ex I/O board [A] ( x 14, x 4) B051R802.WMF 3-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 144: Bicu Board And Controller Board

    BICU board from the controller board. B051R817.WMF 7. Controller board [F] ( x 6) NOTE: Remove the NVRAM, DIMM, and optional boards from the old controller board and install them on the new one. B051/B052 3-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 145: Hdd

    2. Right inner cover (! 3.9.2) 3. Photoconductor unit rail [A] ( x 2) B051R816.WMF 4. High voltage supply board [B] ( x 17,  x 6) NOTE: When reassembling, check that the connectors are correctly set. B051R824.WMF 3-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 146: Power Supply Unit

    4. Duct [C] with bracket [D] x 1, x 1) 5. Oil tank holder [E] ( x 2) 6. Bracket [F] ( x 2) B051R814.WMF 7. Power supply unit [G] x 10, x 6) B051R815.WMF B051/B052 3-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 147: Drive Units

    C and M Development Units 1. Flywheel [A] ( x 3) 2. Unhook the locks [B] and pull out the clutches [C] ( x 1). NOTE: When reassembling, connect the cyan clutch connector to the blue coupler [D]. B051R804.WMF 3-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 148: Development Motor

    3. Development motor [A] x 1, x 3) B051R805.WMF 3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1). 2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3) 3. Main motor [B] ( x 1, x 3) B051R806.WMF B051/B052 3-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 149: Pcu Gear Box

    B051R807.WMF 3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1). 2. Fusing unit motor [A] ( x 1, x 3) B051R808.WMF 3-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 150: Paper Feed Clutch 1

    4. Pull out the handle [A]. 5. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6) 6. Paper feed motor [B] with gears x 1, x 5) NOTE: When reassembling, make sure the vertical transport clutch is in position. B051R810.WMF B051/B052 3-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 151: Registration Clutch

    1, x 2) B051R812.WMF 3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1. Loosen the screws on the paper feed clutch 1 ( 3.11.6). 2. Unhook the lock [A] and pull the clutch out [B] ( x 1). B051R809.WMF 3-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 152: Oil Pump

    [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine. 3. Oil pump bracket [D] ( x 3) 4. Oil pump [E] ( x 2, x 1) Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump. B051/B052 3-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 153: Copy Adjustment

    3rd paper tray (optional SP1-002-4 2 ± 1.5 mm paper tray 1), or LCT 4th paper tray (optional SP1-002-5 paper tray 2) By-pass feed SP1-002-1 B051R558.WMF Duplex, side 2 SP1-002-6 A: Leading Edge Registration B: Side-to-side Registration 3-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 154: Blank Margin

    C: Leading Edge Blank Margin D: Left Edge Blank Margin Main Scan Magnification 1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP5-955-1, No.5). 2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-100-1 if necessary. The specification is ±1%. B051/B052 3-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 155: Scanning

    2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ± 2 mm. SP mode Sub-scan SP4-010 Main-scan SP4-011 B051R928.WMF 3-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 156: Main Scan Dot Position Correction

    5. Press the SP Mode to return to the SP mode. Adjust the SP settings until the output is acceptable. SP4-932-1 Picture element correction red left edge SP4-932-2 Picture element correction red right edge SP4-932-3 Picture element correction blue left edge SP4-932-4 Picture element correction blue right edge B051/B052 3-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 157: Ardf Image Adjustment

    2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary. SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6-006-1 Main Scan Registration ± 10 mm SP6-006-2 Sub-Scan Registration (Simplex) ± 10 mm SP6-006-4 Main Scan Registration (Duplex) ± 10 mm 3-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 158: Ardf Skew Adjustment

    NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment. 4. Move the right hinge position to correct the skewed image. 5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image. 6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5. B051/B052 3-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 159: Color Adjustment

    The ACC should be performed any time when the customer is not satisfied with the image quality. The previous settings of the ACC can be loaded with SP5-610-6. 3-59 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 160: Printer Gamma Correction

    • Text (Letter) mode: single color (SC) • Photo mode: single color (SC) SP 4-918 screen: The screen with SC on it is for single colour mode settings. The other two screens are for full colour mode settings. B502R500.WMF B051/B052 3-60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 161 <on the full color levels 3 through 5 in the copy is copy> seen as gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If the black scale contains C, M, or Y, redo step 1 to 4. 3-61 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 162 Adjust the offset value so that (K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. B051/B052 3-62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 163 NOTE: After adjusting ‘shadow’ as explained above, text parts of the test pattern may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of ‘shadow’ again until it is. 3-63 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 164: Printer Mode

    7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart. NOTE: Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, and then “Highlight”. 8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105. B051/B052 3-64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 165 Calibration does not meet the customer’s requirements. C4 test chart Text Test sheet Photo/Graph C4 test chart Text Test sheet Photo/Graph C4 test chart Text Test sheet Photo/Graph C4 test chart Test Text sheet Photo/Graph 3-65 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 166: Scanner White Level Adjustment

    5. Compare the value with the values in table 1 (when Hammermill Copy Plus is used) or 2 (when Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color is used). 6. Increase or decrease the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1 if necessary.
  • Page 167 Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “247”, do not change any values in SP4-685-001, SP4-686-001, and SP4-687-001. Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “236”, subtract 8 from the value in SP4-685-001, 6 from the value in SP4-686-001, and 8 from the value in SP4-687-001. 3-67 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 168 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Table 2: Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe) SP4-685-001 SP4-686-001 SP4-687-001 SP4-902-2 (Reference (Reference (Reference Remarks (G_DATA1) Adjustment: R) Adjustment: G) Adjustment: B) Increase the values in SP4- 685-1, 686-1, and 687-1.

  • Page 169: Touch Screen Calibration

    Step 2.  6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press 7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings. 3-69 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 170 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 171: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TROUBLESHOOTING CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 172 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 173: Service Call

    NOTE: 1) All SCs are logged. 2) When an electrical circuit board has a problem, check the connections before replacing the PCBs. 3) When a motor has a problem, check the mechanical load before replacing the motor or sensor. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 174: Sc Table

    • The correct value is not input into • BICU board defective (defective ASIC1 on the BICU board when the connection between ASICs) main switch is turned on. • ASICs on the BICU board are not recognized during scanning operation. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 175 → The FGATE negate signal is not detected within 30 seconds. LD error An LD error continues for 0.5 • Defective LD unit seconds. (After an LD error is detected, an LD error release is written to the GAVD chip during monitoring.) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 176 A development process starts. → The • Short circuit in the development unit returning voltage exceeds the target • Defective high voltage supply board by 0.5 Volt or more for 60 • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage milliseconds. supply board) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 177 The discharge circuit is operating at • Fusing bias short circuit the maximum PWM duty value for 60 • Scratched fusing belt milliseconds. • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage supply board) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 178 • The tray is set. → The top of the paper stack is detected. → The bottom plate is lowered. → The stack detection is not cleared within 7 seconds. → These steps are repeated 4 times. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 179 • Incorrect detection (loose thermistor temperature within 50 seconds. connection, fusing - drawer loose connection) Overheat error (heating roller) The heating roller thermistor detects • Short circuit 220°C for 5 seconds. • Defective BICU board • Defective PSU B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 180 60 seconds. Zero cross error The main switch is turned on; the • Defective PSU fusing relay turns on. → 50 Hz or 60 • Incorrect power supply Hz is not detected within 5 seconds. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 181 • Logged only; the machine can still communicating, a checksum error operate has occurred. Engine-to-controller response error The controller has sent a frame with • Defective controller board the RAPI protocol, but the engine • External noise does not respond. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 182 • Stapler overload caused by trying to staple too many sheets • Staple hammer motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation B051/B052 4-10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 183 • Poor stapler motor connection The stapler H.P sensor does not • Defective finisher control board activate within a certain time after the • Defective board stapler motor turned on. • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation 4-11 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 184 • Defective connector but does not recognize the bridge • Defective cable unit. Finisher error The machine does not recognize the • Defective connector finisher, but recognizes the relay unit. • Defective cable • Incorrect installation B051/B052 4-12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 185 Startup without video input end error (G) Video transfer to the engine is • Defective controller board started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time. 4-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 186 • Defective controller board returned an error during the self- • Firmware defective diagnostic test. Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM The optional RAM returned an error • RAM DIMM defective during the self-diagnostic test. • Defective controller board B051/B052 4-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 187 Startup without HD detection when the power key was pressed The hard disk is not detected. • Cable between controller and HD loose or defective • HD power connector loose or defective • HD defective • Controller defective 4-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 188 Mechanical counter 1 is not initialized, • Defective connection or not detected. • Defective counter Mechanical total counter error 2 Mechanical counter 2 is not initialized, • Defective connection or not detected. • Defective counter B051/B052 4-16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 189 • Loss of power during downloading reason the download does not end normally, this could damage the controller board or the PCB targeted for the download and prevent subsequent downloading. If this problem occurs, the damaged PCB must be replaced. 4-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 190: Self-Diagnostic Mode

    Real Time Clock SC826 Detailed Check Real Time Clock Check SC826 Font ROM Sum Check Network Check Error Logged Error Logged Engine I/F Check Error Logged Interrupt Check Error Logged Memory Chip Check Error Logged B051T516.WMF B051/B052 4-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 191: Detailed Self-Diagnostics

    • Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result). • Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes. 4-19 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 192: Image Test Mode

    The LD board has the GAVD test pattern. To make sure the printing control is functioning, output the GAVD test pattern with SP5-955 (Test Pattern is displayed). This test pattern includes the pattern for image adjustment such as registration, blank margin, laser beam pitch, etc. B051/B052 4-20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 193: Electrical Component Defects

    A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and (I/O board) the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is Shorted removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before paper is fed. 4-21 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 194 (BICU) SC460 is displayed. Shorted NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be changed. B051/B052 4-22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 195: Switches

    The machine starts initialization (the sound is 4A/125V 4A/250V heard), but nothing appears on the operation panel. The machine starts program loading, and 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V "Functional Problems" appears on the operation panel with the code "SC901." 4-23 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 196: Check Points For Image Problems At Regular Intervals

    Problems at regular intervals B051T801.WMF Colored spots at 54-mm intervals: Development roller Abnormal image at 68-mm intervals: Transfer roller Abnormal image at 188-mm intervals: Fusing belt Abnormal image at 125-mm intervals: Pressure roller in the fusing unit B051/B052 4-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 197: Service Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE TABLES CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 198 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 199: Service Program Mode

    4. Touch “Copy Sp” on the touch screen. Copy SP Quitting the SP mode 1. Touch “Exit” on the touch screen until the screen Exit display changes. 2. Touch “Exit” on the touch screen until the screen Exit display changes. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 200 Expands or collapses the menu list of each group. Scrolls up or down through the groups. Scrolls up or down to the previous or next page. Scrolls up or down to the previous or next line. Selects the previous or next menu. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 201 If an out-of-range value has been input in the box, the value is ignored. NOTE: If you are prompted to complete the setting, touch “Yes”. 5. Quit the SP mode ( Quitting the SP mode). B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 202: Sp Mode Table

    Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing. [–4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Tray: Thick [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step] Tray: OHP [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step] B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 203 Sets the heating roller temperature for the OHP sheets Color in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1°C/step] Heating: Duplex/1 Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing Color (both sides) in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 150 / 1°C/step] B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 204 Adjusts the stoppage time for the OHP sheet in the fusing unit ( SP1-109-1). [0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step] Pressure Roller Type Pressure Roller Type 0: 2.1 mm Type (New) 1: 1.5 mm Type (Old) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 205 A3. A4 SEF will be detected as A4. If the setting is 1 (LEF): The machine will detect A4LEF as A4. However, if A4 SEF is placed in the bypass tray, it will be detected as A5. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 206 [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The second color toner mage of 2-color printing 3 Colors: 2nd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The second color toner image of 3-color printing B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 207 [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 208 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 12.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/257-296 B051/B052 5-10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 17.0 / 0.1 µA/step] OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 21.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5-11 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 30.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 31.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 30.0 / 0.1 µA/step] B051/B052 5-12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 211 [0 ~ 70.0 / 27.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 15.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 15.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/210-256 5-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 212 Adjusts the paper transfer current at the paper edges. edge [10.0 ~ 20.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 times/step] DFU Normal/2nd/Leading The specified values indicate how many times larger the edge current at the edge is. Thick/1st/Leading edge Thick/2nd/Leading edge OHP/Leading edge Normal/1st/Trailing edge B051/B052 5-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 213 [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] Colors ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step] Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 5-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 214 [1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] Thick/1 Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] Thick/Full Color/1st [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step] Thick/Full Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step] B051/B052 5-16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 215 400 images or less are created after the machine starts. 1C Bias Adjustment Default 50V DFU Default 0V DFU Default 0V DFU Default 0V DFU Paper Transfer Roller Type Paper Transfer Roller 0: Drum Type (New) Type 1: Straight Type (Old) 5-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 216 Firmware v 1.253:01 & [0 ~ 30 / 14 / 1 s/step] controller v 2.01.5. No Interrupt Determines how long the OPC belt is lubricated at the forced lubrication. [0 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step] B051/B052 5-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 217 The average coverage of the outputs after the previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average coverage condition 2. Sheets–1 [10 ~ 80 / 20 / 1 sheet/step] Sheets–2 [10 ~ 80 / 40 / 1 sheet/step] 5-19 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 218 This is done because of the difference in the output of each LD. However, in some cases this correction may cause density differences between sides. 0: off Use this setting if there are density differences between sides. B051/B052 5-20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 219 ITB Cleaning Execution Variable 2-926-01 Cover Ratio Reference (MC) 2-926-02 Cover Ratio Reference (FC) 2-927-01 Disable Time (ITB Cleaning) ITB Cleaning Clutch Off/On Number in Oil 2-970-05 removal mode 3-920-02 Lubrication Cleaning Time – 2C/3C/4C 5-21 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 220 The counter counts down once every narrow (A4 SEF or less) duplex sheet, and counts back up 1 for every other type of sheet. [1 ~ 50 / 10 / 1 /step] B051/B052 5-22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 221 Solutions for codes 110 to 123: Poor connection to the development unit Dirty development bias terminal Abnormal development bias PCU not installed correctly LD unit defective Abnormal charge corona voltage Defective BICU 5-23 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 222 [0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1 /step] Timer Counter [0 ~ 5000 / 1440 / 1 /step] 003* Lubricant Interval Lubricant Interval Sets the process control interval. [0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 10 sheet/step] 0: Disables automatic process control B051/B052 5-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 223 Enables/disables process control execution before ACC. [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled LD-POWER LD 1 Specifies the LD power. DFU LD 2 [0 ∼ 65535 / 716 / 1 /step] 5-25 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 224 With previous versions, the Firmware version clutch is always running while the development roller 1.253:01 and controller motor rotates. [0 ~ 11 / 6 / 1s /step] version 2.01.5. B051/B052 5-26 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 225 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Disables 1: Enables Set this to 1 if the user complains about diagonal lines in solid areas of prints that only use one toner color (M, C, or Y). 5-27 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 226 Black ADS Level Adjusts the erased background level for black-&-white ADS. [0 ∼ 128 / 64 / 1 /step] APS Data Confirmation APS Data Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF Confirmation cover sensor. B051/B052 5-28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 227 Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the SBU unit. [–128 ∼ 127 / 0 / 1 /step] When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit. 5-29 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 228 [–20 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1 %/step] ACC Data Display R DATA 1 Displays ACC data. [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] G DATA 1 B DATA 1 R DATA 2 G DATA 2 B DATA 2 B051/B052 5-30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 229 Picture Element Correction R: Left Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD. [0 ∼ 9 / 5 / 1 /step] R: Right B: Left B: Right 5-31 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 230 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Normal count 1: Double count Custom size Setting Custom size Setting Allows/does not allow custom paper sizes. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Not allowed 1: Allowed B051/B052 5-32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 231 Enables or disables the APS (Auto Paper Selection) mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Enables • 1: Disables Combination (Op. Counter) [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU Combination (Op. Counter) 5-33 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 232 Copy: Key Counter Activates/inactivates the key counter for copy mode. (KC) [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs copy mode operations. B051/B052 5-34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 233 [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use fax mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.. 5-35 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 234 Scanner: Coin Lock Activates/inactivates the accounting device for scanner (CL) mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs the scanner mode operations. B051/B052 5-36 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 235 [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to make mono color copies. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered. 5-37 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 236 Copy: CL Twin Activates/inactivates the accounting device for two-color Color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs two-color copy mode operations. B051/B052 5-38 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 237 Printer: CL Color Activates/inactivates the accounting device for full color printing. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Inactivates 1: Activates When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs full color print mode operations 5-39 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 238 An “unremoved jam” is a paper jam that remains unremoved for 15 minutes. If 1 is selected, the machine beeps if an unremoved jam has occurred. Error Alarm Japan Only Error Alarm [0 ∼ 255 / 40 / 1 /step] B051/B052 5-40 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 239 [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Occurrence) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled CC202 ON/OFF Enables/disables alarms when a cover remains open continuously. (Continuous Door [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Open) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 5-41 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 240 1: Manual Call CC202 Manual Call Selects how the machine handles the continuous door ON/OFF open alarm. (Door Operation: [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Time Length) 0: Auto call 1: Manual Call B051/B052 5-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 241 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] Network application Clears the net file settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] Clears the network settings. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step] 5-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 242 1: On CE Call CSS-PI Device Code CSS-PI device Selects the PI device code. code [0 ∼ 4 / 0 / 1 /step] To validate the setting, turn off and on the main power switch. B051/B052 5-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 243 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) HDD Formatting (Job Log) HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) HDD Formatting (User Info 1) HDD Formatting (User Info 2) HDD Formatting (Scanner Mail) HDD Formatting (Data for a Design) HDD Formatting (Ridoc interface) 5-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 244 [0~1/0/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable The setting for SP5-836- 001 has priority. Capture Setting: Deletes the file(s) that could not send to a PC or Cancel Document waiting for sending. B051/B052 5-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 245 Resolution Conversion Dither print image document is sent to the Document for Dither Print Server via the File Format Converter. (Grayscale processing [1~3/0/1] mode) 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x 5-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 246 Device Name Displays the 1394 device name. [Text up to 13 bytes / NULL / – /step] Cycle Master Validates/invalidates the cycle master function. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Invalidates 1: Validates B051/B052 5-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 247 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Input Check (Controller) Input Check [0x00 ∼ 0x07 / – / 1 /step] DFU (Controller) Default: 00000001 – do not change 5-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 248 4: SG2 (distributed as a package) Delivery Server Specifies the distribution capability. Capability [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 2 /step] Delivery Server Retry [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Timer All Directory Clear Initializes all directories. B051/B052 5-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 249 Changes the default settings of dither print image data (Grayscale transferred externally by the DeskTopBinder V2 page processing reference function via the File Format Converter. mode) [0~3/0/1] 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x 5-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 250 Input the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. Use up to 127 alphanumeric characters. SMTP Port Number Input the port number used when sending e-mail to the SMTP server. [1~65535 / 25 / 1] B051/B052 5-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 251 POP server. 1: OFF: Allows only normal encryption. 2: ON: Allows only APOP encryption. Time out Setting for Sets the wait time after POP validation until the SMTP mail is sent. [0~10000/ 300 /1 ms] 5-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 252 Debug Serial Debug Serial Touch Panel Correction Touch Panel Displays if the operation panel has been calibrated after an Correction SP5-801 execution. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Not calibrated 1: Calibrated B051/B052 5-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 253 Density Adjustment Adjusts the density. [–3 ∼ 3 / 0 / 1 /step] –3: Image becomes lighter 3: Image becomes darker This setting changes the development bias and charge corona voltage to adjust the image density. 5-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 254 Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for testing. (Forward) See section 5.1.5 Feed Motor (Reverse) Do not start to check another item before ending the test that is Trans. Motor in progress. (Forward) Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Stamp Solenoid B051/B052 5-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 255 Exit Plate Home Position Tray Shift Home Position Stack Height Tray Lower Limit Paper Limit 500 Fin Entrance 500 Fin Exit 500 Fin Jogger Home Position 500 Fin Top Cover 500 Fin Height 500 Fin Lever 5-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 256 Adjusts the reading position of the ADF. Moves the Adjustment scanner under the glass to a different position. Use this if there is a scratch on the glass. [–10 ∼ 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] B051/B052 5-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 257 Displays other counter values. [–9999 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] A3/DLT Staple 101* Paper Size Counter Displays the counter values for each paper size. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] DLT (11" x 17") 5-59 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 258 Displays the copy count for each magnification ratio. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Reduce 50% <-->99 % Full Size Enlarge 101% <--> 200% Enlarge 201% <--> 400% Direct Magnification Direct Size Magnification mm (inch) Auto Reduce/Enlarge B051/B052 5-60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 259 1 to 21<-->50 1 to 51<-->100 1 to 101<-->300 1 to 301<-->over Job Counter–Copy Mode Sort Displays the job count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Staple Reserve Copy Check Copy 5-61 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 260 6<-->10 page over 11 pages Document Server–Job Count (File No) 1 file Displays document server printing job counts classified by mode. 2<-->5 files [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] 6<-->10 files Over 11 files B051/B052 5-62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 261 [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step] Tray 2: Non Feed Tray 3: Non Feed Tray 4: Non Feed Bypass: Non Feed 1st Relay ON 2nd Relay: ON 3rd Relay: ON Registration (From Tray) 5-63 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 262 Error Finisher No Response Original Tray by Location Registration Sensor (On Check) Relay Sensor (On Relay Sensor = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9) Check) Inverter Sensor (On Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10) Check) B051/B052 5-64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 263 803* PM Counter Number of Displays the number of sheets printed for each current Development unit. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] For clearing the counters, see SP7-804. Development: M Development: C 5-65 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 264 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] Counter All Clear (except total) Counter All Clear Clears all counters except for SP7-003 and –007. (except total) [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] B051/B052 5-66 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 265 Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet. Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet. 5-67 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 266 Clears the SP7-326 counter. Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears the SP7-327 counter. Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears the SP7-328 counter.1 Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears all the document server counters, which include: SP7-301_SP7-304_SP7-305 SP7-306_SP7-320_SP7-321 SP7-323_SP7-324_SP7-325 SP7-326_SP7-327_SP7-328 B051/B052 5-68 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 267 Tray 4 Roller By-pass Feed Paper Transfer Unit Replace counter [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Development: M Development: C Development: Y Development: Bk Fusing Unit Charger Waste Toner: OPC Waste Toner: Belt Filter 1 5-69 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 268 Machine Counter Clear Machine Counter Clear Clears the machine counter. Toner End Counter K Toner Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the possible print count after a toner near end. C Toner M Toner Y Toner B051/B052 5-70 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 269 Counter 1 For Designer Counter 2 For Designer SP9-XXX: (Etc.) Mode No. Function / [ Setting ] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Discharge Threshold Discharge Threshold [90 ~ 220 / 150 / 0.1 g/m /step] 5-71 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 270 1 dot Grid Pattern – 2 (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot pair Grid Pattern – 2 1 dot Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot pair Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) B051/B052 5-72 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 271: Input Check

    Not detected By-pass Tray Set Not set By-pass Paper End Paper is Paper End present By-pass Paper Size Fusing Unit Set Not set Fusing Exit Paper is Paper End present Fusing Oil End Fusing High Temperature 5-73 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 272 Closed Open Bridge Left Cover Closed Open Bank Upper Relay Relay Sensor 3 (optional No paper Paper present paper tray unit) Bank Lower Relay Relay Sensor 4 (optional No paper Paper present paper tray unit) B051/B052 5-74 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 273 Scanner HP sensor Detected Not detected Position Recycle Counter Mechanical Counter Set Not set Counter Set Not set Key Counter Set Not set Shift Tray Home Detected Not detected Position Sensor Platen Cover Detected Not detected Sensor 5-75 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 274 00100110 HLT LEF Detected None 00000110 Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 Paper height sensor 1 Code Full 11111111 Nearly full 11111110 11111101 Near end 11111100 B051/B052 5-76 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 275 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 5-77 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 276 500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor Closed Opened 500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor Locked Not Locked B051/B052 5-78 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 277: Output Check

    Lower Paper Feed Tray 2 paper feed clutch Clutch Upper Relay Roller Tray 1 vertical transport clutch Clutch Lower Relay Roller Tray 2 vertical transport clutch Clutch Transfer Motor: Half Main motor: 178 mm/s Speed 5-79 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 278 Paper Transfer: + Paper transfer bias: + Paper Transfer: – Paper transfer bias: – T/B Cleaning: + Image transfer belt cleaning bias: + Discharge: H Discharge plate power supply: H Discharge: L Discharge plate power supply: L B051/B052 5-80 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 279 Ozone Fan: Hi Ozone Fan: Low Bridge Cooling Fan: H Bridge Cooling Fan: L PSU Fan Forced Lubricant The following parts are switched on. O/B cleaning contact clutch T/B cleaning solenoid T/B cleaning contact clutch 5-81 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 280 500 Fin Stapler Motor Staple Hummer 500 Fin Free Run 1 Stapler Gate Sol 500 Fin Free Run 2 Pos. Roller Sol Feed-out Motor Shift Motor Guide Plate Motor Fin Free Run 1 Fin Free Run 2 B051/B052 5-82 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 281 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest original jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest original jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest original jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest original jam 5-83 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 282: Copy Jam History Display

    Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest paper jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest paper jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest paper jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest paper jam B051/B052 5-84 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 283 SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter. Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes. Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID. 5-85 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 284 • Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed from their factory settings. • Do the white level adjustment ( Section 3.14 Standard White Density Adjustment) 6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary adjustments. B051/B052 5-86 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 285 SP4-301 displays a code that indicates the current status of the APS sensors. The table lists the codes and the activated sensors. B051S540.WMF Sensors Code — — — — — — — — Other combinations : Activated —: Deactivated 5-87 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 286: Program Download

    In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the following: Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and switch on. The machine boots from the IC card. Download the new firmware. Others: Replace the appropriate PCB. B051/B052 5-88 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 287 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Open SP5-824. 6. Touch EXECUTE to start uploading the NVRAM data. 7. Turn off the main switch, and then remove the IC card. B051S136.WMF 5-89 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 288 • If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution halts. B051/B052 5-90 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 289: Rev.06/2003

    NOTE: Hold down the key before touching System Settings. B051S503.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. 5-91 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 290: Copier Setting Reset

    NOTE: Hold down the key before touching Copier/Document Server Features. B051S504.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. B051/B052 5-92 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 291: User Tools

    In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry. The following SP mode settings will be displayed. • Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1) • Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2) • Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3) • Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4) • Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4) 5-93 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 292: Counter

    If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from the IC card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to ON. BICU Board: SW2 Function ⇒ Machine B052 (32 minute B/W) B051 (24 minute B/W) Type Off: Off: Off: Off: Destination...

  • Page 293: Detailed Section Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 294 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 295: Overview

    7. Original width sensor 18. Paper tray 1 8. Scanner motor 19. Laser optics unit 9. Sensor board unit 20. Development unit 10. Original length sensors 21. OPC belt unit 11. Fusing unit 22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 296: Paper Path

    11. Paper overflow sensor 25. Lower tray exit sensor (Finisher) 12. Exit sensor (Interchange unit) 26. Paper limit sensor (Finisher) 13. Entrance sensor (Duplex unit) 27. Entrance sensor (Finisher) 14. Paper exit sensor 15. Fusing exit sensor B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 297: Drive Components

    6. Development clutch - K 17. Paper feed clutch 1 7. Development clutch - Y 18. Vertical transport clutch 1 8. Development motor 19. Registration clutch 9. Development clutch - C 20. Paper transfer solenoid 10. Paper size switch 1 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 298: Drive Power Path

    • Paper transfer solenoid [R] → Paper transfer roller contact mechanism • Interchange unit and one-bin tray Paper Feed [N] • Paper feed clutch [O ] → Paper pick-up roller (Stepper) • Vertical transport clutch [P B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 299: Electrical Components

    6. SBU (sensor board unit) 2. Scanner HP sensor 7. Lamp stabilizer 3. Platen cover sensor 8. Original width sensor 4. Original length sensor 1 9. Operation panel 5. Original length sensor 2 10. Exposure lamp B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 300: Image Transfer

    13. Heating roller fusing lamp 6. T/B waste toner sensor 14. Oil overflow sensor 7. O/B waste toner sensor 15. Heating roller thermostat 8. O/B waste toner bottle switch 16. Oil end sensor T/B: Image transfer belt O/B: OPC belt B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 301: Paper Path

    6. Paper feed sensor 16. Exit cover switch 7. Paper near-end sensor 1 17. Paper exit sensor 8. Right lower cover switch 18. Main power switch 9. Paper near-end sensor 2 19. Front cover switch 10. Vertical transport sensor B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 302: Development Units

    1. Rear development board 6. Memory chip M 2. Laser synch. detection board 7. Memory chip C 3. Front development board 8. Memory chip Y 4. Polygonal mirror motor 9. Memory chip K 5. LD unit B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 303: Boards

    11. Controller board 4. EX I/O board 12. High voltage supply board 5. BICU board 13. Oil pump 6. Controller fan 14. Fusing unit fan 7. Power supply unit 15. Paper exit fan 8. Ozone fan B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 304: Board Structure

    Scanner Stabilizer Panel Motor Polygon Motor Scanner IOB ARDF BICU Thermistors LD Units Fusing Lamps Paper Inter- Tray Unit/ 1-Bin Tray change Ex-IOB High Bridge Clutches/ By-pass Duplex Voltage Sensors Motors Unit Solenoids Finisher B051D554.WMF B051/B052 6-10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 305 5. Scanner IOB (Scanner Input/Output Board) Handles the following functions. • Serial interfaces with ARDF and operation panel • Scanner motor control 6. SBU (Sensor Board Unit) The SBU converts the analog signals from the CCD into digital signals. 6-11 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 306: Controller

    The fax option, however, requires FCU and NCU installation also. Systems and application software can be downloaded from the controller’s IC Card slot. For details about how to download software from an IC card (! 5.2). B051/B052 6-12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 307 Erased after power off. Remains stored even after cycling Job Log 10 MB Job log power off/on. Scanner 1024 MB For mail Erased after power off. Others 840 MB Debug Erased after power off. Total 4100 MB 6-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 308: Copy Process

    1. Development unit 6. Quenching lamp 2. OPC belt 7. OPC belt cleaning unit 3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 8. Charge corona unit 4. Image transfer belt 9. Polygonal mirror 5. Paper transfer roller unit B051/B052 6-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 309 8. Fusing The fusing unit fuses the image to the paper. 9. Cleaning The image transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the belt. 10. Quenching The quenching lamp erases any remaining charge on the OPC belt. 6-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 310: Process Control

    " & Environmental When the change in the temperature/humidity sensor change output since the previous process control exceeds a certain value. SP3-004 can be used to change the threshold temperature and humidity values. B051/B052 6-16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 311: Supplementary Information On Process Control

    Black development bias initialisation (step 3) has to be done more often, because tests have shown that process control errors occur more often if this is not done. 6-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 312 The counter is in the NVRAM on the controller board, and is reset after process control. The counter is not reset after black development unit or black toner cartridge replacement. This is because only a few of the process control steps are done after replacing these components. B051/B052 6-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 313: Scanning

    ADF mode: The ADF feeds the original past the ADF exposure glass. The 1st scanner moves under the ADF exposure glass. The original does not stay on the glass, but keeps going to the ADF exit. 6-19 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 314: Scanner Drive

    Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the ADF feed speed. Main-scan magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board. NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the ADF feed- speed (! SP6-006-5). B051/B052 6-20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 315: Original Size Detection

    (Also see SP 1-940.) NOTE: Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the ARDF. The table (next page) shows the sizes that are detected for various sensor outputs. 6-21 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 316 11" x 8.5" B5-S A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” is displayed on the operation panel. B051/B052 6-22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 317: Image Processing

    SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals. It sends these signals to the BICU board. The BICU board processes the image, then the image data is sent to the LD unit. 6-23 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 318: Sbu Block Diagram

    • The differences in the white level across the page, including irregularities in the CCD and the optical parts across the main scan, are corrected. Others The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if originals are scanned through the ARDF. B051/B052 6-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 319: Black Level Correction

    • Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine scans down the page. VPU Test Mode To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 (for more details, see chapter 4, “Troubleshooting”). 6-25 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 320: Shading Correction

    • The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification ratio. • If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the closest integer, but further correction is needed (! “Picture Element Correction”). B051/B052 6-26 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 321 3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white background. 4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for A/D conversion. 5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter. 6-27 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 322: Image Separation

    Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the original is considered black and white. B051/B052 6-28 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 323: Color Conversion

    • The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data. NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a service manual and will not be covered here. 6-29 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 324 This is deliberate, since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings may no longer be suitable. • Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5- 610-5. B051/B052 6-30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 325 (figure 5). Fig. 5 B051D993.WMF Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure Fig. 6 B051D994.WMF 6-31 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 326: Error Diffusion

    The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion matrix. ASICs on the BICU Board Test You can check the ASIC for the image processing on the BICU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2. (! “4. Troubleshooting” for details) B051/B052 6-32 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 327 12. Paper transfer roller unit 27. C development unit 13. T/B waste toner bottle full sensor 28. OPC belt support 14. Registration roller 29. Y development unit 15. Image transfer belt 30. K development unit 6-33 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 328: Charge Corona Unit

    A4 (LT) LEF (or smaller) 1 count 4 counts Others 2 counts 8 counts NOTE: 1) The counter always increases as shown in the table. These values are not adjustable. 2) To set the counter, use SP2-801 (! 5.2.2). B051/B052 6-34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 329: Opc Belt Drive

    NOTE: The OPC belt and transfer belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect the OPC belt by turning it, you must also turn the transfer belt at the same time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts. 6-35 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 330: Bottle Detection

    When the bottle becomes full, a message appears on the operation panel. The machine can make 100 more prints, then further printing is disabled. The bottle has a cap on the waste toner outlet. Empty the bottle when you visit the customer. B051/B052 6-36 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 331: Image Transfer Belt Unit

    NOTE: The transfer belt and OPC belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect the transfer belt by turning it, you must also turn the OPC belt at the same time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts. 6-37 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 332: Belt Mark Detection

    The terminal in the middle of the PCU contacts the terminal on the transfer roller shaft when the image transfer belt unit is installed in the PCU. The current is adjusted based on environmental temperature and humidity. B051/B052 6-38 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 333: Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit

    Set Switch and Full Sensor When the bottle is full, a message appears on the operation panel. After this, 100 more prints can be output. Then the machine stops and printing is disabled. 6-39 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 334: Contact Mechanism

    When the solenoid activates, the hook is released, drive from the motor is transferred from the gear to the clutch, the cam [D] makes half a turn, the lever drops, and the cleaning unit contacts the transfer belt B051/B052 6-40 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 335 Fusing unit motor [C] " drive gear [D] " gears [A] and [E] " cleaning brush [J] and toner collection augers [H and I] The clutch [B] controls the on/off timing of the mechanism. 6-41 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 336: Laser Exposure

    7. W-Toroidal lens (WTL) 2. Synchronization Detector 8. Fθ Lens 3. Synchronization Detector Mirror 9. 1st Mirror 4. Dust Shield Glass 10. 2nd Mirror 5. 3rd Mirror 11. Cylindrical Lens 6. Polygon Mirror Motor Unit B051/B052 6-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 337: Polygon Mirror Motor Unit

    It also allows the polygon motor to operate at a lower speed, which cuts down noise emission and makes the motor last longer. The LD unit does not need any adjustment when replaced. 6-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 338: Ld Safety Switch

    2 contacts on the front door and on the right door (series circuit). When either of the covers is opened, the power supply is interrupted, preventing laser emission. LDDR BICU LD5V Interlock Control Switch B051D499.WMF B051/B052 6-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 339: Operation Panel Display And Switch Mechanism

    → Front and right covers open B051D901.WMF Front cover switch Right cover switch Interlock switch → Right cover open B051D902.WMF [A]: Front cover switch [B]: Right cover switch [C]: Interlock switch [D]: Actuator (front cover) [E]: Actuator (right cover) 6-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 340: Development

    4. Development agitator 9. OPC belt 5. Development unit ! : Development – Mono-component Development – Double Development Roller Process The development units operate in the following order: K → M → C → Y B051/B052 6-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 341: Development Unit

    Memory Chip Each toner cartridge contains a memory chip, which contains information on whether the cartridge is “new” or “not new”. 6-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 342: Toner Supply Mechanism

    [M]: Toner cartridge agitator gear [G]: Doctor roller Drive Development motor [A] → development clutch [B] → lever [C] → agitators [J]. Development motor [A] → development clutch [B] → development roller gear [E] → development roller [I] B051/B052 6-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 343: Rollers And Agitators

    Regulates the amount of the toner on the development roller Shutter Each toner cartridge has a shutter on its right side. The shutter is pushed open when the cartridge is installed in the development unit, and closed when removed from the unit. 6-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 344: Toner End Detection

    20 s period, the machine returns to standby mode after idling all development units for 90 s. • However, if a low toner condition was detected during that 20 s period, the machine indicates toner near-end. B051/B052 6-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 345: Toner End Detection

    However, if the sensor does not detect sufficient toner after 5 minutes of development unit drive, the toner end condition remains and a new cartridge must be added. 6-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 346: Development Unit Contact Mechanism

    !  Color Processes – Color Development – Fixed Position Development Systems – Similar to Example 2: Model G033 [A]: OPC belt [B]: Development clutch B051D305.WMF Reverse Rotation The gears reverse at intervals to prevent toner from clumping. B051/B052 6-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 347: Power Source

    [B]. This charge is the same as the charge applied to the development roller. However, the development roller charge is applied through a different terminal [E]. !  Mono-component Development – Toner Metering Blade (similar principle) 6-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 348: Paper Feed

    13. Paper end fence (Tray 1) 7. Path from optional paper tray The table lists the main and optional paper stations. Tray Number Main/Optional Standard tray Main unit By-pass tray Optional unit Paper tray unit B051/B052 6-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 349: Transport Speed

    The fusing unit motor [A] drives the registration roller [H], under the control of the registration clutch [B]. The idle roller [G] facing the registration roller does not have any drive gears. It turns with the paper [I]. 6-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 350: Paper Lift

    When paper runs out, the paper end sensor feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the bottom plate. This actuates the sensor [C], and the paper end message appears on the operation panel. B051/B052 6-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 351: Paper Size Detection

    * On: Pushed Off: Not pushed NOTE: 1) For the input check table, ! 5.2.2. 2) Other paper sizes are not detected. Use the System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Tray Paper Size user tool to set paper sizes. 6-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 352: Paper Transfer And Separation

    A user tool specifies the paper weights. If “Plain” is selected, then another user tool defines when the paper is “normal” or “> 90 g/m , 24lb”. • “Plain” means normal or > 90 g/m , 24lb. • “Thick” means paper heavier than 105 g/m (28 lb). B051/B052 6-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 353: Contact/Separation Mechanism

    When the solenoid is activated, the hook is released, so the half-turn clutch makes a half-turn—the unit moves to the right and contacts the image transfer belt. 6-59 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 354: Power Supply

    This helps the paper separate from the image transfer belt. Temperature/Humidity Control The temperature-humidity sensor [D] is inside the rear-right cover. The sensor output is used to control the current for the paper transfer roller. The temperature and humidity can be read with SP2-912. B051/B052 6-60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 355: Roller Cleaning

    3) Positive and negative charge is applied alternately to remove any toner that is still stuck to the paper transfer roller. Toner removed from the paper transfer roller goes back to the image transfer belt, where it is removed by the image transfer belt cleaning unit. 6-61 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 356: Image Fusing And Paper Exit

    6. Heating roller thermistor 14. Fusing sponge roller 7. Thermostat 15. Spring roller 8. Heating roller fusing lamp 16. Metal cleaning roller The fusing unit divides into two subunits: the fusing subunit and the oil supply subunit. B051/B052 6-62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 357: Drive

    The hot roller [A] turns the fusing belt [F] as a result of the friction between the two. When the right cover is open, gear [C] moves away, which allows jammed paper to be removed from the fusing unit and exit easily. 6-63 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 358: Fusing Unit Components

    300 °C when it rises rapidly. Normally, the machine cuts the lamp power when the thermistor detects 220 °C. Pressure Roller Pawls The pawls [J] above the pressure roller help prevent paper jams. B051/B052 6-64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 359: Fusing Bias

    Fusing Unit SCs If a thermistor/thermostat problem occurs, a fusing unit SC may be displayed on the operation panel. Fusing unit SCs disable the machine (! 4.1.1). To reset fusing unit SCs, use SP5-810 (! 5.1.2). 6-65 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 360: Oil Supply

    • Oil tank [A] " Oil pipe [D] (oil pump [C]) " Oil reservoir [F] " Felt [G] " Oil supply roller [I] " Oiling roller [J] The fusing sponge roller [K] removes excess oil from the fusing belt. The metal cleaning roller [L] removes foreign substances from the belt. B051/B052 6-66 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 361: Oil Supply

    • If the oil end sensor fails, the oil overflow sensor [B] detects when the reservoir is full [C], and the pump stops (SC571 will be generated, and the machine must be repaired). This failsafe measure prevents oil flooding inside the machine. 6-67 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 362: Oil End Detection And Recovery

    This will clear the oil end counter, and the machine incorrectly detects oil. 8) If the oil end condition is cleared, the procedure ends. If not, the code “SC 570” appears again. B051/B052 6-68 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 363: Temperature Control

    (! 5.2.2). ‘>90 g/m2, 24 lb’ means ‘greater than or equal to 90 g/m2, 24 lb’. • ‘Thick’ means paper heavier than 105 g/m (28 lb). *5: Both sides of the paper are processed with the same roller temperatures. *6: Use SP1-105 to adjust the default fusing temperatures (! 5.2.2). 6-69 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 364: Energy Saver Modes

    • Energy saver timer: System Settings – Timer Setting – Energy Saver Timer • Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off Timer • Auto off disabling (SP mode): Set SP5-305 to "disable." This disables the auto off mode. B051/B052 6-70 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 365: Panel Off Mode

    The return time from the panel off mode is about 3 seconds (level 1) or 10 seconds (level 2). Operation Energy Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V Switch Saver LED Level 1 Heating roller: Pressure roller: 120 Panel off Level 2 Heating roller: Pressure roller: 115 6-71 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 366: Low Power Mode

    • A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table The return time from the low power mode is about 30 seconds. Operation Energy Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V Switch Saver LED Heating roller: 140 Low power Pressure roller: 100 B051/B052 6-72 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 367: Auto Off Mode

    The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The return time is about 99 seconds. Operation Energy Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note Switch Saver LED Stand-by (On when printing) +5VE is supplied 6-73 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 368: Paper Exit

    6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION [A]: Feeler [B]: Paper overflow sensor [C]: Paper [D]: Tray B051D507.WMF When the paper overflow sensor [B] is deactivated, the machine detects that the paper stack height exceeded the limit and stops printing. B051/B052 6-74 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 369: Specifications

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 370 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 371: General Specifications (Main Unit)

    5 Enlargement & 7 Reduction A4/A3 version LT/DLT Version 400, 200, 141, 122, 400, 200 155, 129, Enlargement 115% 121% Full Size 100% 100% 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, Reduction 50, 25% 50, 25% B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 372 NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit +1000-sheet Finisher Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 670 x 781 mm (21.65" x 26.37" x 30.74") Weight: Less than 80 Kg (176 lb) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 373: Machine Configuration

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS 2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS B051V500.WMF B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 374 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Machine Common Version Item Code with Copier Main Frame 8 cpm color/24 cpm B051 black and white Main Frame 10 cpm color/32 cpm B052 black and white ARDF (Optional) B386 B022/B027 Platen Cover (Optional) B484 Paper Tray Unit (Optional)

  • Page 375: Optional Equipment

    135 g/m , 16 lb to 42 lb Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer) Dimensions (W x D x H): 413 x 435 x 126 mm Weight 3.0 kg (6.6 lbs) B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 376: By-Pass Tray Unit

    Length: 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight: 52 g/m to 135 g/m , 16 lb to 36 lb Power Consumption: 10 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 117 x 447 x 92 mm Weight: 1.6 kg B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 377: Lct

    250 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.): A4 or smaller Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: 17 W Weight: 1.1 kg 530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm Size (W x D x H): B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 378 Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 40 W Weight: 8.3 kg (18.4 lbs.) Dimensions (W x D x H): 350 x 490 x 230 mm B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 379: Upper Tray

    Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 50 W Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs) Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1") B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 380 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 381: Firmware History

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FIRMWARE HISTORY CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 382 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 383: Main Machine Firmware Modification History

    Please check the http://tsc.ricohcorp.com website for current firmware downloads. Accessory firmware modification history is provided in the appropriate accessory section of the service manual. MAIN MACHINE FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY FIRMWARE SERIAL FIRMWARE DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION LEVEL NUMBER VERSION B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 384 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 385: Fax Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B502 FAX UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 386 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 387 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT B502 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 1.1 FAX UNIT ..................... 1 1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ..................8 1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT ................. 8 1.2.2 ISDN OPTION ................... 14 1.2.3 EXPANSION MEMORY..............19 1.2.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE KIT ............20 1.2.5 HANDSET ..................
  • Page 388 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..........44 SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)................. 44 SP2-XXX (RAM Data)................44 SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)..............45 SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) ..............46 SP5-XXX (Initializing)................46 SP6-XXX (Reports)................46 SP7-XXX (Test Modes)................48 4.2 BIT SWITCHES ..................49 4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ................
  • Page 389 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Regular Transmission ................143 Print and Transmission ................ 143 Using the Document Server..............143 6. SPECIFICATIONS................144 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS..............144 2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......... 146 3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..............147 7. FIRMWARE HISTORY ..............148 1. FAX FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY ..........148 B502 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 390 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 391: Fax Unit B502

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 FAX UNIT  CAUTION Before installing this fax unit, 1) Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is an optional printer installed. 2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 392 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT B502I014.WMF 6. Remove the fan with the bracket [A] ( x 5,  x 1). 7. Remove the ground bracket [B] ( x 3). 8. Remove the BCU cover [C] ( x 13). U.S. V -U.S.
  • Page 393 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT 10. Attach the speaker [A] ( x 2). B502I012.WMF U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I111.WMF B502I011.WMF 11. Turn the MBU battery switch (SW1) [B] on. NOTE: The MBU [C] is on the FCU [D]. 12.
  • Page 394 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT U.S. V -U.S. ERSION VERSION B502I005.WMF B502I105.WMF 13. Connect the FCU [A] to the BiCU [B] and install it in the copier ( x 5). 14. For the U.S. version, connect one connector to the NCU and the other one to the speaker connector.
  • Page 395 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT 16. Replace the dummy keypad [A] with the fax keypad [B]. 17. Replace the third key-slot cover [C] with the fax key [D]. B502I007.WMF 18. Attach the decal (SUPER G3) [E] to the front cover. B502I008.WMF B502 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 396 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT 19. Install the stamp cartridge [A] if the ARDF [B] has been installed. B502I006.WMF 20. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2). 21. Attach the FCC decal [C] and serial number decal [D]. NOTE: The FCC decal is for the U.S.
  • Page 397 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT 22. Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack [A]. NOTE: For the European and Asian models, attach the ferrite core [B] to the telephone line. 23. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn the main switch on. NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is grounded.

  • Page 398: Fax Unit Options

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT  CAUTION Before installing this optional unit, 1) Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is an optional printer installed. 2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 399 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I105.WMF B502I005.WMF 7. Remove the FCU [A] ( x 2 for the U.S. version/ x 3 for the non-U.S. version,  x 5). 8. Attach the CCU interface [B] to the FCU bracket [C] (...
  • Page 400 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 10. Attach the G3 bracket [A] ( x 3). 11. Connect the SG3-D [B] to the CCU interface [C] and secure it ( x 2). B502I052.WMF U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I151.WMF B502I054.WMF 12.
  • Page 401 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 13. Set up the jumper switches [A and B] on the NCU. NOTE: NOTE: European/Asian models only (non-U.S. version: B503-27) TB1 [A] TB2 [B] Default Region/ Hong Kong Country Hungary Poland Czech Republic Israel South Africa Regions/countries where the CTR21 standard is valid...
  • Page 402 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I053.WMF B502I153.WMF 14. Attach the FCU [A] to the copier and connect the connectors ( x 4 for the U.S. version/ x 5 for the non-U.S. version). 15. Connect the harness [B] to the SG3-D and the NCU. NOTE: The ferrite core is near the lower connector.
  • Page 403 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 18. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2). 19. Attach the FCC decal [A] right above the LINE 2 jack. NOTE: The FCC decal is for U.S. and Canada only. B502I016.WMF 20. Connect the telephone line to the LINE 2 jack [B].

  • Page 404: Isdn Option

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2.2 ISDN OPTION  CAUTION Before installing this optional unit, 1) Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is an optional printer installed. 2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 405 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I105.WMF B502I005.WMF 7. Remove the FCU [A] ( x 2 for the U.S. version/ x 3 for the non-U.S. version,  x 5) 8. Attach the CCU interface [B] to the FCU bracket [C] (...
  • Page 406 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 10. Connect the SiG4 [A] to the CCU interface [B] and secure it ( x 2). B502I101.WMF U.S. V -U.S. V ERSION ERSION B502I102.WMF B502I152.WMF 11. Attach the FCU [C] to the copier and connect the connectors ( x 3 for the U.S.
  • Page 407 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 13. Attach the cable clamp [A]. NOTE: When installing both G3 Interface Unit Type 1232 and ISDN Option Type 1232, attach the G3 clamp [B] to the right side and the ISDN clamp [A] to the left side. 14.
  • Page 408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 17. Connect the telephone line to the ISDN jack [A]. NOTE: For the European and Asian models, attach the ferrite core [B] to the telephone line. 18. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn the main switch on.

  • Page 409: Expansion Memory

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2.3 EXPANSION MEMORY NOTE: Expansion memories are not provided. Locally procure an expansion memory that meets the specifications (same as other recent models — see the specifications section). 1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2). 2.

  • Page 410: Fax Function Upgrade Kit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE KIT 1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2). 2. Remove the fan with the bracket ( x 5,  x 1). 3. Remove the ground bracket ( x 3). 4.

  • Page 411: Handset

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.2.5 HANDSET NOTE: The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only. B502I114.WMF 1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover. 2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown. 3.

  • Page 412: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT 1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board. 2.

  • Page 413: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report.
  • Page 414 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection. reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. •...
  • Page 415 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory functions. is full. • Confidential rx •...
  • Page 416 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection. reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors. • Replace the NCU or FCU. • Defective remote terminal. • Check for line noise or other line problems. •...
  • Page 417 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc. could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass response to JM JM to the other end.
  • Page 418 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. • Update the modem ROM. • Replace the FCU. 2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding • Replace the FCU. (cpu not ready) 2-23 JBIG compression or •...
  • Page 419 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 5-00 Data construction not • Replace the FCU. possible 5-01 Data reconstruction not possible 5-10 DCR timer expired 5-20 Storage impossible because • Temporary memory shortage. of a lack of memory •...
  • Page 420 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise. received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).

  • Page 421: Error Codes For The Isdn Option

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2 ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION The tables on the following pages show the error codes for the ISDN option. The meaning of the numbers in the Action column is as follows. 1.

  • Page 422: D-Channel Layer Management

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2.1 D-CHANNEL LAYER MANAGEMENT Code Probable Cause Action 7-00 Link reset 7-01 Link set-up failed because of time-out. 7-02 Link release failed because of time-out. 7-03 Link set-up parameter error 3.2.2 D-CHANNEL, LAYER 1 Code Probable Cause Action...

  • Page 423: D-Channel Network Layer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2.4 D-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 7-40 Insufficient mandatory information elements 7-41 Abnormal LI for a mandatory information element 7-42 T301 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN 7-43 T303 timeout; timeout while waiting for R: CALL-PROC etc. 7-44 T304 timeout;...

  • Page 424: B-Channel Network Layer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2.6 B-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 7-80 A packet having an abnormal GFI was received 7-81 A packet was received that had a logical channel number different from the logical channel being used for the communication 7-82 A packet containing a format error was received 7-83...

  • Page 425: Session Layer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2.8 SESSION LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 8-30 Invalid frame received 8-31 RSSN received 8-32 CSA received 8-34 Calling terminal identification error in CSS 8-35 Date and time error in CSS 8-36 Window size error in CSS 8-37...

  • Page 426: Document Layer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION 3.2.9 DOCUMENT LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 8-60 T.62 coding format error (LI error) 8-61 A mandatory PI was absent, or the LI for a mandatory PI was 0 8-62 Calling/called terminal identification LI was different from that specified by F.184 (LI = 24) 8-63 The LI for session user data exceeded the maximum value (512)

  • Page 427: Fax Sc Codes

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX SC CODES 3.3 FAX SC CODES 3.3.1 OVERVIEW When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition other than SC1201 and SC1207, it resets itself automatically (default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or resetting the switches. NOTE: For details on Fax SC Codes 1201 and 1207, refer to the following sections.

  • Page 428: Fax Sc Code Table

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX SC CODES 3.3.4 FAX SC CODE TABLE Sys Switch Sys Switch Suggested SC Code Description Action 1F bit 7 = 0 1F bit 7 = 1 1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic SC Code (See section 2.3.1.for reset display...

  • Page 429: Isdn Test Function

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ISDN TEST FUNCTION 3.4 ISDN TEST FUNCTION 3.4.1 LEDS There are four LEDs on the G4 board. These LEDs describe the status of the machine. LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 Initial Settings O=ON, --=OFF Initial check (if the flash ROM is updated) Handshaking with the FCU ready Standby Mode...

  • Page 430: Back-To-Back Test

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ISDN TEST FUNCTION 3.4.2 BACK-TO-BACK TEST To make a back-to-back test, you need: • Two machines, one with the CiG4 board (G4 board used in the FX4, FR4, ADAM, NAD, Stinger, and Russian) and the other with the SiG4 board (G4 board used with the Schmidt 3, S4, and Kaiser 1).

  • Page 431: Service Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 4. SERVICE TABLES  CAUTION Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.

  • Page 432: Sp Mode Button Summary

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons. B502S500.WMF Opens all SP groups and sublevels. " Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Not used for the Fax SP mode.

  • Page 433: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing 1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window. 2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test print.

  • Page 434: Service Program Mode Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Rev. 03/2003 4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ⇒ SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 4.2 Bit Switches Mode No. Function System Switch 001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option Section 4.2 Bit Switches Scanner Switch 001 –...

  • Page 435: Sp3-Xxx (Tel Line Settings)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Rev. 03/2003 Mode No. Function G3-1 NCU Parameters ⇒ 001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters G3-2 NCU Parameters 001 – 023 CC, 01 –...

  • Page 436: Sp4-Xxx (Rom Versions)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) Mode No. Function FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version. Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes. G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version. G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.
  • Page 437 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Mode No. Function G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last (1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line. G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all (All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line. G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last (1 Communication)

  • Page 438: Sp7-Xxx (Test Modes)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP7-XXX (Test Modes) These are the test modes for PTT approval. Function G3-1 Modem Tests G3-1 DTMF Tests Ringer Test G3-1 V34 (S2400baud) G3-1 V34 (S2800baud) G3-1 V34 (S3000baud) G3-1 V34 (S3200baud) G3-1 V34 (S3429baud) Recorded Message Test G3-2 Modem Tests G3-2 DTMF Tests...

  • Page 439: Bit Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2 BIT SWITCHES  WARNING Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 440 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Rx level calculation Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by - 16 to get the rx level.
  • Page 441 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line 25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line Note: “40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short protocol. G4 Communication Parameters Compression mode MMR: MMR compression MR: MR compression...
  • Page 442 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003 FUNCTION COMMENTS Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out. Bit 7 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, Always disabled but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow User selectable RDS operations to take place.
  • Page 443 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010 FUNCTION COMMENTS Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on the transmission result report transmission result reports.
  • Page 444 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled 0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the polling reception file is erased.
  • Page 445 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016 FUNCTION COMMENTS Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory functional settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter 00: France 11: USA settings and communication parameter RAM...
  • Page 446 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018 FUNCTION COMMENTS Type of TTI used for 1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the transmission using the ten-key destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for polling transmission and manual transmission using the handset.
  • Page 447 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Rev. 03/2003 System Switch 16 SP No. 1-101-023 FUNCTION COMMENTS Parallel Broadcasting 1: When the G4 or/and G3 unit is installed, the machine sends messages simultaneously using 0: Disabled both available ports (PSTN/ISDN) during 1: Enabled broadcasting.
  • Page 448 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030 FUNCTION COMMENTS RTI/CSI/CPS display 1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the 0: Disabled LCD panel during communication. 1: Enabled Not used Do not change the settings. System Switch 1E SP No.
  • Page 449 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031 FUNCTION COMMENTS Address display priority in the 0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the AI redial mode telephone number information, the machine displays 0: RTI/CSI RTI/CSI. 1: Telephone number 1: The machine always displays the telephone number.
  • Page 450 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
  • Page 451 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES Scanner Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings) Scanner Switch 01 SP No. 1-102-002 FUNCTION COMMENTS Scan density step value When scan density is adjusted manually away from (Text mode) the Normal setting, the threshold value for binary picture processing changes for each step from the value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by the...
  • Page 452 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Scanner Switch 05 SP No. 1-102-006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Binary picture processing: This setting determines the threshold value for Threshold for colored binary picture processing in colored background background special original 2 special original 2 mode (when the scan density mode - Normal setting (center setting is at the center).

  • Page 453: Scanner Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Scanner Switch 0B SP No. 1-102-012 FUNCTION COMMENTS Scan margin setting (right and left margin in book scan ADF mode) The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (unit 0.5 mm). Default setting: 2 mm Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan and ADF mode) The setting can be between 0 and 7 (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
  • Page 454 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Scanner Switch 0D SP No. 1-102-014 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Scan width for A5 lengthwise or 0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5") B5 lengthwise originals width. The transmitted image has a blank area on 0: 210 mm (8.5”) the right.

  • Page 455: Printer Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed. 0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two 1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a “2”...
  • Page 456 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS) A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width 256 mm width A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width...
  • Page 457 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length data reduction. 0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 1: Enabled to 7) 1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
  • Page 458 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is Cross reference enabled.
  • Page 459 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015 FUNCTION COMMENTS Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the 0: Width received data is selected first. 1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first.
  • Page 460 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016 FUNCTION COMMENTS Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other manufacturers Disabled fax machines frequently. Disabled Enabled Not used Duplex printing...

  • Page 461: Communication Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 Bit 1 Modes protocol.
  • Page 462 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 01 SP No. 1-104-002 FUNCTION COMMENTS If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all 0: Off 1: On communications. In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically. Not used Do not change the setting.
  • Page 463 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003 FUNCTION COMMENTS Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is negative code (RTN or PIN) is received. received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it transmission receives RTN or PIN.
  • Page 464 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
  • Page 465 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012 FUNCTION COMMENTS Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the Quick/Speed dials which meets requesting terminal’s own fax number with all the the requesting terminal’s own Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine.
  • Page 466 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014 FUNCTION COMMENTS The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes) detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes. reception into memory) is disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax...
  • Page 467 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 14 SP No. 1-104-021 FUNCTION COMMENTS Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch transmission format are transmitted without conversion. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion.
  • Page 468 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 16 SP No. 1-104-023 FUNCTION COMMENTS G4 Dual communication 1: The machine uses only one B channel for 0: Enabled communication. This enables a customer to occupy 1: Disabled another B channel for other purposes such as internet communication.
  • Page 469 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029 FUNCTION COMMENTS Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B. 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 0: On to 1.

  • Page 470: G3 Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through communication (tx and rx) the communication. Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in Disabled the T.30 protocol.
  • Page 471 CTC transmission conditions When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower 0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1) modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode) 1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4) or four times (ITU-T mode). This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.
  • Page 472 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission. 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you 0 0 1 1 7.2 k...
  • Page 473 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
  • Page 474 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010 FUNCTION COMMENTS ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting...
  • Page 475 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval reception.
  • Page 476 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change the settings. Data rate threshold during V.34 The machine changes the modulation parameters in reception the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting during V.34 reception.

  • Page 477: G3-2 Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES These switches require an optional G3 interface unit. G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001 FUNCTION COMMENTS Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through communication (tx and rx) the communication.
  • Page 478 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004 FUNCTION COMMENTS DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same (Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice. 0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the 1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
  • Page 479 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission. 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you...
  • Page 480 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007 FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
  • Page 481 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011 FUNCTION COMMENTS Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop drop during image data time.
  • Page 482 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012 FUNCTION COMMENTS Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits 0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System Switch 0F) is programmed. Protocol requirements: Spain Change the required bits manually at installation.

  • Page 483: G4 Internal Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 00 FUNCTION COMMENTS Country code Bit 4 Country Germany (1TR6 mode) Universal (Europe Euro ISDN) Note: In Germany, use the Universal setting for the Euro ISDN lines. G4 Internal Switch 01 - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Internal Switch 02 - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Internal Switch 03 FUNCTION...
  • Page 484 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 05 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change these settings. Protocol ID check The Protocol ID is in the CR packet. 0: Yes 1: No Not used Do not change these settings. G4 Internal Switch 06 - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Internal Switch 07 - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Internal Switch 08 - Not used (do not change these settings)
  • Page 485 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP) FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change these settings. Information transfer capability shift 1: The machine changes the ISDN G3 down to retry transmission information transfer capability informed in the [SETUP] signal to “Speech”...
  • Page 486 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP) FUNCTION COMMENTS Condition for fallback from G4 to 0: Fallback occurs when a CPS code is the same as the CPS code settings specified by G4 internal switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 0: Refer to the CPS code setting 1: Fallback in response to any CPS...
  • Page 487 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 15: D channel layer 3 (Judgement R: MSG) FUNCTION COMMENTS Action when receiving [SETUP] This bit depends on user requirements. If it is signal containing no called at 1, communication will be halted if the other terminal has not input the subaddress.
  • Page 488 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Internal Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval) FUNCTION COMMENTS Transfer capabilities (SI) informed This bit determines whether transfer in 1TR6 ISDN G3 transmission capabilities informed in the Service Indicator for 1TR6 ISDN G3 transmission. This switch is 0: G3 Fax effective in coping with communication 1: Analog...
  • Page 489 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 to G3 fallback Bit 0 of Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, or fallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled. The CPS codes for which fallback occurs are decided as follows. • G4 bit switch 17, bit 7 - If set to “0”, fallback occurs on receipt of a code from a set that depends on the country code.

  • Page 490: G4 Parameter Switches

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES 4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES G4 Parameter Switch 00 FUNCTION COMMENTS Network type Do not change the default setting. Bit 2 Type Circuit switched ISDN Other settings: Not used Not used Do not change the default settings. G4 Parameter Switch 01 FUNCTION COMMENTS...
  • Page 491 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Parameter Switch 05 FUNCTION COMMENTS Not used Do not change these settings. B-channel T3 timer 1: This switch is useful when used in 0: 30s 1: 57s combination with the Communication Bit SW 07 bit 4. This is to cope with communication problems where G4 communication fails on the ISDN B- channel.
  • Page 492 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BIT SWITCHES G4 Parameter Switch 09 - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Parameter Switch 0A - Not used (do not change these settings) G4 Parameter Switch 0B FUNCTION COMMENTS Transport block size This value must match the value set in the Bit 3 Value other terminal.
  • Page 493 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS 4.3 NCU PARAMETERS The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105);...

  • Page 494: Ncu Parameters

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is disabled. 680502 Line current wait time Line current is not 680503 Line current drop detect time detected if 680501 contains FF. 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD)
  • Page 495 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF, the machine pauses for 68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the pause time (680520 / 68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) 680521).
  • Page 496 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. 680537 International dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) 680538 International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF, the machine pauses for...
  • Page 497 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018 (parameter 17). 680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019 (parameter 18). 680552 -N x 0.5 –3.5 Tone attenuation level of DTMF SP2-103-020 (parameter signals while dialing 19).
  • Page 498 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) For a code of 0: 680565 - FF 680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) 680566 - F0 680567 Not used Do not change the settings. 680571 680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:...
  • Page 499 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. 6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit (low byte) 6805A3 BCD (Hz) Acceptable CED detection frequency If both addresses contain lower limit (high byte)
  • Page 500 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS Address Function Unit Remarks 6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB) level 6805BA ISDN: Tx level from the modem - dBm The setting must be between -12dBm and - 15dBm.
  • Page 501 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NCU PARAMETERS NOTES 1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address. 2. Italy and Belgium only RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning. Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium) Bit 1 - Not used Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy) If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are...

  • Page 502: Dedicated Transmission Parameters

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.

  • Page 503: Parameters

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 4.4.2 PARAMETERS The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled. Switch 01 FUNCTION AND COMMENTS ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode) If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this byte.
  • Page 504 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 03 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too 0 0 0 0 Not used high.
  • Page 505 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 04 FUNCTION COMMENTS V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end 0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), 1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol. 0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
  • Page 506 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS Switch 10 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required FUNCTION COMMENTS Attachment of the Higher Layer This bit determines whether Higher Layer Capabilities Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP] signal or not. Not used Do not change the setting. ISDN G3 information transfer In tx mode, this determines the information transfer capability...

  • Page 507: Service Ram Addresses

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES  CAUTION Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.” 680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
  • Page 508 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On Bits 1 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On 6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled...
  • Page 509 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the “Tone” mark over an ISDN line 0: UUI, 1: Tone Bits 2 to 5: Not used Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit...
  • Page 510 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F) Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout Bit 2 1 Setting 1st paper feed station 2nd paper feed station 3rd paper feed station 4th paper feed station Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4: Not used Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off...
  • Page 511 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet finisher) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: Journal format 0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette selection feature becomes empty.
  • Page 512 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18) Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4) Setting File retention impossible 24 hours File retention impossible 72 hours Bits 2 to 7: Not used 6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bits 0 to 3: Not used Bit 4: RDS operation...
  • Page 513 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6802D3(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex) 6802D4(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character. 6802E0 to 6802E2(H) - PSTN-1 line settings 6802E0 Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX.
  • Page 514 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 68030C(H) - Network type used for the service station number 0 1 (H) - PSTN-1 0 2 (H) - PSTN-2 1 0 (H) - G4 0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection 680310 to 680317(H) - Last power off time (Read only) 680310(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM) 680311(H) - Year (BCD)
  • Page 515 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES 6803A6 to 6803AB(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only) 6803A6(H) - Part number (low) 6803A7(H) - Part number (high) 6803A8(H) - Control (low) 6803A9(H) - Control (high) 6803AA(H) - DSP (low) 6803AB(H) - DSP (high) 680406(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD) 680407(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD) 680422(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

  • Page 516: Detailed Section Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERVIEW 5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 5.1 OVERVIEW Fax Function Upgrade CCUIF Controller M BU Expansion Mem ory B502D501.WMF The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU, an MBU and an NCU. The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller board.

  • Page 517: Boards

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2 BOARDS 5.2.1 FCU ISDN SRAM Flash ROM (256 kB) (3 MB) CPU BUS FACE2 V.34 FCUIF MODEM (RU30) DMA BUS Analog Circuit DRAM (8 MB) Monitor Function Speaker Upgrade DIMM Unit (32 MB) (512 kB) B502D510.WMF The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

  • Page 518: Mbu

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS DRAM • The 8 MB of DRAM is shared as follows. SAF memory : 2MB Working memory : 2MB Page memory : 4MB • The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery. Memory back-up •...

  • Page 519: Ncu (Us)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2.3 NCU (US) OHDI SW. Surge Protection TRXD Noise Over- Filter Relay RING DC Loop current Transformer Protection Surge Protection Current Sensor OHDISW CMLSW Hook0 Hook1 ExRing Ring Noise Detection Filter Circuit B502D520.WMF Jumpers Item Description These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry line.

  • Page 520: Ncu (Europe/Asia)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) Noise SHUNT CML Relay Filter DCLSW Filter (16Hz) DO Sw. RING TRXD Current Sensor Loop OHDI Sw. DOSW OHDISW GS Sw. CMLLSW Hook0 Hook1 SHUNT GSSW Noise Filter Ring CSEL Detection RSEL Circuit ExRing B502D521.WMF Control Signals and Jumpers...

  • Page 521: Ncu (Optional G3 Interface: Europe/Asia)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2.5 NCU (OPTIONAL G3 INTERFACE: EUROPE/ASIA) RITONE DOSW DCLSW Noise Charging Filter -Pulse Eject Surge TRXD Current Protect Line Limit Trans Current Detect DC Loop RING CMLSW Circuit SHUNT HOOK 0,1 Filter OHDISW Ring Detect EXRING RCSEL GSSW SHUNT...

  • Page 522: Sg3 Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2.6 SG3 BOARD SG3-D SG3-D NCCP FROM SDRAM (8Mbit) (16Mbit) (Ru30) DPRAM DMAC JBIG CODEC (modem) B502D902.WMF The SG3 board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used in combination with the FCU. NCCP (New Communication Control Processor) •...

  • Page 523: Sig4 Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BOARDS 5.2.7 SIG4 BOARD Flash SiG4 DRAM SYSTEM BUS LAPD ISDN Reset ICCP ISDN Circuit Controller Interface Analog I/F CODEC Circuit MODEM B502D500.WMF The SiG4 (Standard ISDN G4) board contains ICCP (ISDN Communication Control Processor), Flash ROM, DRAM, LAPD controller, CODEC, ISDN interface and analog interface.

  • Page 524: Video Data Path

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA VIDEO DATA PATH 5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH 5.3.1 TRANSMISSION SCANNER BICU FACE2 Page Memory QM-CODER QM-CODER (Option) Modem Modem NCCP SiG4 ISDN G4 ISDN G3 Analog G3 Analog G3 B502D511.WMF B502 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 525: Memory Transmission And Parallel Memory Transmission

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA VIDEO DATA PATH Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The BICU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU. NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.

  • Page 526: Reception

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA VIDEO DATA PATH 5.3.2 RECEPTION Analog G3 Analog G3 ISDN G3 ISDN G4 SiG4 Modem Modem QM-CODER CCD (DCR) QM-CODER NCCP Page Memory FACE2 BICU Printer B502D512.WMF First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line or an ISDN line to the SAF memory.

  • Page 527: Fax Communication Features

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 5.4.1 PERSONAL/INFORMATION/TRANSFER BOXES When an incoming message has a SUB or SEP code attached, the machine will look for a Personal Box, Transfer Box or Information Box with an identical SUB or SEP code.

  • Page 528: Transfer Box

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES Transfer Box The user can create transfer boxes in the machine’s memory for forwarding incoming fax messages. Each box must have a name and a code. Each box must also have destinations associated with it; any message arriving in this box will automatically be sent on to these destinations.

  • Page 529: Information Box (Polling Tx)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES Information Box (Polling Tx) The user can set up documents in memory to be picked up by another machine. The user makes an information box for each document. The information box is identified by a code. Anybody who wishes to call the fax machine and receive the document from the information box has to input this code as the SEP code when calling the machine.

  • Page 530: Multi-Port

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 5.4.2 MULTI-PORT When the optional ISDN Unit or optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same time through the two or three lines at once. Available protocol Option Available Line Type Combinations Standard only...

  • Page 531: Document Server

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 5.4.3 DOCUMENT SERVER Scanner Controller Comoressed Page BICU Memory FACE2 Modem PSTN DATA/ADDRESS BUS SiG4 To ISDN B502D514.WMF The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board. Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD.

  • Page 532: Lan Fax Driver

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 5.4.4 LAN FAX DRIVER Application Fax Driver Compressed MMR Fax Number Address/Book CONTROLLER BICU PRINTER FACE2 Modem PSTN DATA/ADDRESS BUS SiG4 Page To ISDN Memory B502D515.WMF B502 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 533: Regular Transmission

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES The fax driver makes print data from an application, then compresses the print data into MMR data. PJL commands are added to the compressed data and the destination telephone number and the line selection are included in the PJL commands.

  • Page 534: Specifications

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Type: Desktop type transceiver Circuit: PSTN (max. 2ch.) PABX ISDN Connection: Direct couple Original Size: Book (Face down) Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins] Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins] ARDF (Face up) (Single-sided document) Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]...
  • Page 535 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM) Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/ 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Automatic fallback G4: 64 kbps/56 kbps I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB Standard: 2 MB...

  • Page 536: Capabilities Of Programmable Items

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS 2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed. With Fax Function Item Standard Upgrade Unit Quick Dial 1200 Groups Destination per Group...

  • Page 537: Machine Configuration

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS 3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION B502V115.WMF Description Description Description NCU board SiG4 board Fax function upgrade Modular jack CCU interface board MBU board Optional NCU board FCU board Controller board SG3-D board Expansion memory Item Machine Code Remarks Fax Option Type 1232 B502 1, 7, 10...

  • Page 538: Firmware History

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FIRMWARE HISTORY FIRMWARE HISTORY 1. FAX FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY If no firmware history data is present in the table below, then no data was available at the time of this service manual's printing. Please check the http://tsc.ricohcorp.com website for current firmware downloads.

  • Page 539: Printer/Scanner Controller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B463/B529 PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLER CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 540 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 541 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 05/2003 PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLER B463/B529 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION................1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............. 1 1.2 PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION ............1 Accessory Check ..................1 Printer, Printer/Scanner Controller Installation......... 2 1.3 PRINTER OPTIONS..................6 1.3.1 POSTSCRIPT UNIT (B522)..............6 1.3.2 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (G539) ............
  • Page 542 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 5/2003 4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........37 4.1 OVERVIEW ....................38 4.2 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ..............38 4.2.1 RPCS DRIVER .................. 38 4.2.2 PCL5C DRIVER................. 38 4.2.3 PS3 DRIVER ..................39 CMS (Color Management System) ............39 Gray Correction ..................
  • Page 543 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 05/2003 Channel Settings ................... 54 Troubleshooting Steps ................55 4.7 SCANNER FUNCTIONS ................56 4.7.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE ....... 56 Image Data Path ..................56 SPECIFICATIONS................57 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS..............57 1.1 PRINTER....................57 Supported Paper Sizes ................58 Paper Feed ....................
  • Page 544 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 545: B463/B529

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Please refer to section 1 of the main unit service manual. 1.2 PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION Accessory Check Check the accessories in the box against the following list: Description Q’ty Note IEEE1284 (Centronics) Board Network Interface Board DIMM –...

  • Page 546: Printer/Scanner Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION Printer, Printer/Scanner Controller Installation CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: When installing this unit, 128 MB or 256 MB memory must be installed. B529I004.WMF B529I104.WMF B529I005.WMF 1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 2).
  • Page 547 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION B529I304.WMF B529I303.WMF B529I305.WMF B529I306.WMF 9. Remove the plate [A] ( x 2). 10. Install the printer or printer/scanner controller ROM DIMM [B] in Slot 1 on the controller board. NOTE: The colored label on the DIMM indicates the correct slot. For example, install the DIMM with a blue label in the slot with the blue lock.
  • Page 548 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION B529I308.WMF B529I009.WMF B529I007.WMF B529I309.WMF 13. Install the NVRAM board [A] ( x 2). 14. Install the memory [B]. 15. If the optional IEEE1394 or wireless LAN will not be installed, install the cover plate [C] ( x 2).
  • Page 549 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION B529I006.WMF 18. Attach the FCC label [A] to the controller panel board as shown. NOTE: This step is required only in the USA models. 19. Replace the left rear cover. 20. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover. 21.

  • Page 550: Printer Options

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER OPTIONS 1.3 PRINTER OPTIONS 1.3.1 POSTSCRIPT UNIT (B522) CAUTION Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: To install the Postscript option, the printer option (B463 or B529) must be installed first ( 1.2).

  • Page 551: Ieee1394 Interface (G539)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 05/2003 1.3.2 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (G539) CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: To install the IEEE1394 option, the printer option (B463 or B529) must be installed first ( 1.2).

  • Page 552: Wireless Lan (B515)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 05/2003 1.3.3 WIRELESS LAN (B515) CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: To install the wireless LAN option, the printer option (B463 or B529) must be installed first ( 1.2).
  • Page 553 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER OPTIONS B529I008.WMF If wireless LAN reception is not very good, install the extended antenna. 5. Remove the wireless LAN card [A] from the machine. 6. Remove the standard antenna [B] from the wireless LAN card. 7. Install the extended antenna [C] on the LAN card, as shown. NOTE: The antenna jack must be at the bottom end.

  • Page 554: Checking The Connections

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 5/2003 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER INSTALLATION (B519) 1.3.4 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS 1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch. 2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page. (User Tools/ Printer Settings/ List Test Print/ Config. Page) The same data can also be printed using the printer service mode.
  • Page 555 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rev. 5/2003 ⇒ 1. Remove the rear cover and controller board cover (☛ steps 1 and 2 of the printer/scanner installation section). 2. If the cover plate [A] has been installed, remove it (! x 2). 3.

  • Page 556: Purpose Of The File Format Converter

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rev. 5/2003 ⇒ 1.5.1 PURPOSE OF THE FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) In previous models (such as B003 or B022 Series), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy and print jobs from the document server and convert them to a TIFF format.

  • Page 557: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER ERRORS Rev. 05/2003 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 CONTROLLER ERRORS Refer to section 7.1 of the main unit service manual for descriptions on SC code information because the GW architecture includes controller SC codes in the main unit SC code table. 2.2 LEDS AND TEST POINTS LEDs and test points are not used for this option (except for the NIB section...

  • Page 558: Service Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Rev. 05/2003 3. SERVICE TABLES SERVICE PROGRAM MODE CAUTION Before accessing the service menu, do the following: Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED must not be lit or blinking). If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.

  • Page 559: Printer Service Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE 3.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE Service Table Key Notation What it means [range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
  • Page 560 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 05/2003 PRINTER SERVICE MODE Resolution Settings Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. 1800x1200 Photo 1800x600 Text 1800x600 Graph 600x600 Photo 600x600 Text Test Page Color Gray Scale Prints the Color Calibration Test Sheet or Color Test Pattern to check the color balance before and after Color Pattern toner control adjustment (gamma adjustment).

  • Page 561: Sp Modes Related To The Printer Controller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINTER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode. ⇒ Section 5.1.2 of the main unit service manual. SP No. Description Function and Setting 5104 A3/DLT Double Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT.

  • Page 562: Scanner Service Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE 3.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE SP1-XXX (System and Others) Mode No. Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) [System] Model Name Displays the model name. Scanner Firmware Displays the scanner firmware version.

  • Page 563: Sp2-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) [Text (print) mode settings] MTF Filter Coefficient Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan (Main scan) direction for Text mode. Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
  • Page 564 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.2: Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.2: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 85 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.
  • Page 565 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.3: Contrast Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using binary picture processing mode. [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.3: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 100 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.2: Brightness...
  • Page 566 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.3: Contrast Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using binary picture processing mode. [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.3: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 100 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.2: Brightness...
  • Page 567 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No. 4(Middle): [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Threshold Notch No.3: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.3: Contrast Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using binary picture processing...
  • Page 568 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No. 4(Middle): [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Threshold Notch No.3: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.3: Contrast Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using binary picture processing...
  • Page 569 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.7(Lighter): [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU B - Threshold Notch No.6: [ 0 to 255 / 177 / 1/step ] DFU R - Brightness Notch No.6: [ 0 to 255 / 174 / 1/step ] DFU...
  • Page 570 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.3: [ 0 to 255 / 127 / 1/step ] DFU G - Brightness Notch No.3: [ 0 to 255 / 127 / 1/step ] DFU B - Brightness Notch No.3: R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 136 / 1/step ] DFU...
  • Page 571 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) MTF Filter Coefficient As above, for sub scan (Sub scan) [ 0 to 13 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU Smoothing Filter Selects the smoothing pattern when using grayscale processing mode.
  • Page 572 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.5 G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 161 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.5: B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 164 / 1/step ] DFU Notch No.5: [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU R - Threshold...
  • Page 573 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Mode Number Function / [Setting] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Notch No.2: [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU G - Threshold Notch No.2: [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU B - Threshold Notch No.
  • Page 574 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.3.2 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B519 MEDIA LINK BOARD) After installing the File Format Converter (MLB) and upgrading the software, the following SP modes will be available. Number/Name Function/[Setting] ⇒ Capture Setting Capture Function With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
  • Page 575 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Number/Name Function/[Setting] ⇒ Capture Setting: Determines the resolution conversion ratio when Resolution Conversion for a color print image document is sent to the Color Print Document Server via the File Format Converter. [0~3/3/1] 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x...
  • Page 576 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Number/Name Function/[Setting] ⇒ Capture Setting: Format Determines the image format for Binary Print for Binary Print images sent to the Document Server via the File Format Converter. [0~3/1/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG 1: TIFF/MMR 2: TIFF/MH 3: TIFF/MR Capture Setting: Format...

  • Page 577: File Format Converter

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER SERVICE MODE Rev. 05/2003 Number/Name Function/[Setting] ⇒ Print: Color Changes the default settings of color print image data transferred externally by the DeskTopBinder V2 page reference function via the File Format Converter. [0~3/3/1] 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 3: 1/4 x...

  • Page 578: Firmware Update Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE Rev. 05/2003 3.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE Firmware updating procedure is described in section 5.2 of the main unit service manual. 3.5 POWER-ON SELF TEST The controller tests the following devices at power-on. If an error is detected, an error code is stored in the controller board.

  • Page 579: User Program Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA USER PROGRAM MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.7 USER PROGRAM MODE 3.7.1 PRINTER USER PROGRAM MODE Press the “Printer” key on the operation panel to enter the printer mode. ⇒ Press the “User Tools/Counter then select “Printer Settings” to change printer settings.

  • Page 580: Scanner User Program Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA USER PROGRAM MODE Rev. 05/2003 3.7.2 SCANNER USER PROGRAM MODE ⇒ Press the “User Tools/Counter then select “Scanner Settings” to change scanner settings. User Mode Tree User Tools/ Basic Settings Program Change Scanner Features Delete Initial Setup Program 1 ~ 9 Scanner Settings Send/Store Connection Timeout...

  • Page 581: Detailed Section Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERVIEW Rev. 05/2003 4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 OVERVIEW OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION 2.5" HDD IEEE1284 IC Card Net File/ (128/256 MB) Printer Scanner SDRAM IC Card I/F Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 DIMM Flash ROM DIMM (4/8 MB) Local BUS System On-board...

  • Page 582: Print Data Processing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINT DATA PROCESSING Rev. 05/2003 4.2 PRINT DATA PROCESSING 4.2.1 RPCS DRIVER Printer Host Controller Engine ICM Engine/ ICM profile 8 bit K Gray RPCS Driver Correction UCR/BG Matching Corrected RCM profile 8 bit CMYK γ Correction CMYK Toner Limitation CMYK...

  • Page 583: Ps3 Driver

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINT DATA PROCESSING Rev. 05/2003 4.2.3 PS3 DRIVER Color CMYK CIE ABC 8 bit Matching PS Driver CMYK CMYK CMYK CMYK 1 bit Fine Fine Super CMYK BG/UCR 8 bit Vivid (RGB Super Vivid Correction) None CMM/ ICC/ICM Profile B529D564.WMF...

  • Page 584: Toner Limitation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRINT DATA PROCESSING Rev. 05/2003 Toner Limitation Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines. Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit). •...

  • Page 585: Controller Functions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.3 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 4.3.1 SAMPLE PRINT This function gives users a chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run. • The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 5.8 GB. This partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.

  • Page 586: Paper Source Selection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.3.4 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select) The Tray Priority setting determines the Priority Tray Start of Tray Search start of the tray search when the user selects “Auto Tray Select” with the driver.

  • Page 587: Auto Continue

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.3.5 AUTO CONTINUE When this function is disabled, the machine stops printing and cancels the print job if there is no paper tray which matches the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.

  • Page 588: Paper Output Tray

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.3.6 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY The default paper output tray for each application (copy/fax/printer) can be selected using the System Settings menu in the user tools. (User Tools/ System Settings/ General Features) If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the default tray, the default paper output tray is used.

  • Page 589: Stapling

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.3.8 STAPLING Stapling is available when the 500-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher is installed. The finishers have the following stapling positions. 500-sheet Finisher Paper Feed Direction (Printed side) 1000-sheet Finisher Stapled 2 places Paper Feed Direction (Printed side) B529D501.WMF...

  • Page 590: Nib

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Rev. 05/2003 4.4 NIB 4.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Flash ROM Controller Oscillator DP83846 Filter Module RJ45 Network B529D503.WMF • The Flash ROM contains the NIB firmware. The firmware can be upgraded using an IC card connected to the controller board. 4.4.2 LED INDICATORS LED2 (Yellow) LED1 (Green)

  • Page 591: Ieee1394 Interface

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE1394 INTERFACE Rev. 05/2003 4.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 4.5.1 SPECIFICATIONS Hardware Specification Interface: IEEE1394 (6 pins) (no power supply, cable power repeated, IEEE1394a-2000 compliant) Ports: 2 ports Data rates: 400Mbps/200Mbps/100Mbps System Requirements Windows PC with IEEE1394 port Microsoft Windows 2000 upgraded with service pack 1 Cable length: 4.5m (15ft) 4.5.2 IEEE1394 IEEE1394, also known as FireWire (a name patented by Apple), is an easy-to-use...

  • Page 592: Block Diagram

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE1394 INTERFACE Rev. 05/2003 4.5.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM IEEE1394 Board Clock EEPROM Oscillator 1394 I/F Link Controller TSB41AB2 TSB12LV23A 1394 I/F B529D505.WMF • PHY: Physical layer control device • Link: Link layer control device • EEPROM: 256-byte ROM Pin 1 Pin 6 B529D507.WMF...

  • Page 593: Remarks About This Interface Kit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE1394 INTERFACE Rev. 05/2003 4.5.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT Note the following points about this unit. • The machine does not print reports specifically for IEEE1394. Just print the Configuration Page at installation to check that the machine recognizes the card. •...

  • Page 594: Ip Over Ieee1394

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE1394 INTERFACE Rev. 05/2003 4.5.7 IP OVER IEEE1394 This machine supports IEEE1394 printing by setting an IP address. This feature is called ‘IP over 1394’. The former IEEE1394 printing without IP address is known as ‘SCSI printing’. Software Application TCP/IP (Virtual) Port SCSI (Virtual)

  • Page 595: Ieee802.11B (Wireless Lan)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) Rev. 05/2003 4.6 IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) 4.6.1 SPECIFICATIONS A wireless LAN is a flexible data communication system used to extend or replace a wired LAN. Wireless LAN employs radio frequency technology to transmit and receive data over the air and minimize the need for wired connections.

  • Page 596: Transmission Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) Rev. 05/2003 4.6.3 TRANSMISSION MODE The following transmission modes are provided for wireless communication. Ad hoc Mode The ad hoc mode allows communication between each device (station) in a simple peer-to-peer network. In this mode, all devices must use the same channel to communicate.

  • Page 597: Security Features

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) Rev. 05/2003 4.6.4 SECURITY FEATURES SSID (Service Set ID) The SSID is used by the access point to recognize the client and allow access to the network. Only clients that share the same SSID with the access point can access the network.

  • Page 598: Communication Status

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) Rev. 05/2003 4.6.5 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES Communication Status Wireless LAN communication status can be checked with the UP mode “W.LAN Signal” in the Maintenance menu. This can also be checked using the Web Status Monitor or Telnet. The status is described on a simple number scale.

  • Page 599: Troubleshooting Steps

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) Rev. 05/2003 Troubleshooting Steps If there are problems using the wireless LAN, check the following. 1) Check the LED indicator on the wireless LAN card. 2) Check if “IEEE802.11b” is selected in the UP mode LAN Type in Network Setup in the Host Interface menu.

  • Page 600: Scanner Functions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SCANNER FUNCTIONS Rev. 05/2003 4.7 SCANNER FUNCTIONS 4.7.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BICU board. The IPU chip chooses the most suitable image processing methods (gamma tables, dither patterns, etc) depending on the settings made in the driver.

  • Page 601: Specifications

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 05/2003 SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 PRINTER Plain Paper Thick Printing Speed: Color 10 ppm 4 ppm 2 ppm Black & White 36 ppm 6.5 ppm 3.2 ppm Printer Languages: PCL5c RPCS (Refined Printing Command System) PostScript 3 (Option) Resolution: 600 x 600 dpi (PCL5c/RPCS/PS3)

  • Page 602: Supported Paper Sizes

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 05/2003 Supported Paper Sizes Paper Feed M.U. B.T. P.T. Paper Size NA ER AS NA ER AS Co NA ER AS NA ER AS 297 x 420 mm M 257 x 364 mm M 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm M 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm...
  • Page 603 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 05/2003 Paper Output Shift 500-Sheet 1000-Sheet Paper Size M.U. 1-B Tray Finisher Finisher Clr Shft Clr Shft Stpl Prf Clr Shft Stpl 297 x 420 mm 257 x 364 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 148 x 210 mm...

  • Page 604: Scanner

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 05/2003 1.2 SCANNER Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan Resolution: 600 dpi Available scanning Twain Mode: Resolution Range: 100 ~ 1200 dpi Delivery Mode: 100 ~ 600 dpi Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB Scanning Black &...

  • Page 605: Software Accessories

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 05/2003 1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES The printer/scanner drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install. Printer Drivers Printer Windows Windows Windows Windows Macintosh Language 95/98/ME NT4.0 2000...
  • Page 606 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 607: Paper Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B456 PAPER TRAY UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 608 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 609 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER TRAY UNIT B456 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 REAR COVER....................1 1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES................1 1.3 LIFT MOTORS ..................... 2 1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR ................2 1.5 CONTROLLER BOARD ................2 1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................
  • Page 610 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 611: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA REAR COVER 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 612: Lift Motors

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LIFT MOTORS 1.3 LIFT MOTORS 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Lift motors [A][B] ( x 2,  x 1) B456R005.WMF 1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1. Rear cover (! 1.1) 2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, ...

  • Page 613: Paper Feed Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED UNIT 1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT 1. Vertical transport guide plate of the copier [A] ( x 1) 2. Vertical transport guide plate of the paper feed unit [B] B456R001.WMF 3. Paper feed clutch (! 1.2) 4.

  • Page 614: Pickup, Feed, And Separation Rollers

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1.7 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1. Paper tray [A] 2. Pickup roller [B] (1 hook) 3. Paper feed roller [C] ( x 1) 4. Separation roller [D] ( x 1) B456R009.WMF 1.8 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS 1.

  • Page 615: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B456D001.WMF 1. Paper size switch 1 12. Reverse roller 2. Paper size switch 3 13. Paper guide 3. Paper height sensor 1 14. Tray lift arm 4. Paper height sensor 2 15.

  • Page 616: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B456D002.WMF 1. Paper size switch 2 9. Paper feed clutch 2. Paper size switch 1 10. Tray lift motor 3. Paper size switch 3 11. Right cover switch 4. Paper size switch 4 12.

  • Page 617: Paper Feed

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED 2.3 PAPER FEED B456D004.WMF Paper Feed Mechanism An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used (!  Paper Feed Methods). Drive Path Tray 1 (upper tray) and tray 2 (lower tray) have identical paper feed systems. The paper feed motor [A] drives all the rollers in the unit.

  • Page 618: Paper Size Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER SIZE DETECTION 2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION B456D007.WMF Four paper size switches [C to F] detect paper size. They use the paper tray actuator [A], which is linked with the end plate [B]. The table lists the combinations of switch status and detected paper size.

  • Page 619: Reverse Roller And Pick-Up Roller Release

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE 2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE B456D108.WMF B456D109.WMF The pickup roller and separation roller release the paper when it is not being fed. This helps remove jammed paper easily. When the paper tray [A] is not in the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from the paper feed roller [C] and the pickup roller stays in its upper position.

  • Page 620: Paper Lift

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER LIFT 2.6 PAPER LIFT B456D005.WMF The tray lift motor [C] raises/lowers the tray bottom plate [A] (via the coupling gear [B]), based on the signals from the paper size switches, paper end sensor, and upper limit sensor. The motor starts to lift the plate when all of the following three conditions exist: any of the paper size switches is pushed, the paper end sensor actuator is in the sensor, and the upper limit sensor actuator is out of the sensor.

  • Page 621: Paper Height And End Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION 2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION Paper Height Detection B456D006.WMF Two paper height sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray. The actuator [A] on the lift arm shaft [D] turns counterclockwise, passing through the paper height sensor 2 [C] and the paper height sensor 1 [B].

  • Page 622: Paper End And Bottom Plate

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION Paper End and Bottom Plate B456D106.WMF The paper end sensor [A] detects paper end. When the paper is all used, the paper end sensor feeler [B] drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate. When paper end is detected, the tray lift motor (! 2.6) lowers the bottom plate.

  • Page 623: Large Capacity Tray

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B457 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 624 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 625 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 TRAY......................1 1.2 SENSORS ....................2 Paper Height Sensors of Paper Storage Side.......... 2 Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2 ..........2 1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE............... 3 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................
  • Page 626 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 627: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws  : Connector ...

  • Page 628: Sensors

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SENSORS 1.2 SENSORS Paper Height Sensors of Paper Storage Side 1. Tray (! 1.1) 2. Rear fence [A] ( x 2) 3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2) 4. Paper height sensors [C] ( x 2) B457R002.WMF Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2 5.

  • Page 629: Changing The Tray Size

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE 1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE 1. Fence screws [A through D] 2. Change the position of the fences. NOTE: Before fastening the screws, set paper in the tray. B457R004.WMF 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1.

  • Page 630: Tray Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY MOTOR 1.5 TRAY MOTOR 1. Rear cover (! 1.4) 2. Tray motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3) B457R006.WMF 1.6 MAIN BOARD 1. Rear cover (! 1.4) 2. Main board [A] ( x #,  x 1) B457R007.WMF B457 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 631: Stack Transport Clutch

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH 1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH 1. Rear cover (! 1.4) 2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Bushing [B] 4. Gear [C] 5. Stack transport clutch [D] ( x 1) B457R008.WMF 1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1.

  • Page 632: Paper Feed Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED UNIT 1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT 1. Paper feed clutch (! 1.8) 2. Gears [A][B] 3.  x 1 [C] B457R010.WMF 4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [D]. 5. Paper feed unit [E] ( x 2) B457R011.WMF B457 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 633: Pickup, Feed, And Separation Rollers

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS 1. Tray (! 1.1) 2. Separation roller [A] ( x 1) 3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Pickup roller [C] B457R012.WMF 1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY SENSORS 1.

  • Page 634: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B457D001.WMF 1. Pickup Roller 7. Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 2. Upper Limit Sensor 8. Lower Limit Sensor 3. Paper Feed Roller 9. Paper End Sensor 2 4.

  • Page 635: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B457D002.WMF B457D003.WMF 1. Main board 10. Paper height sensors 1, 2, 3 2. Tray sensor 11. Lower limit sensor 3. Stack transport clutch 12. Upper limit sensor 4. Tray motor 13.

  • Page 636: Electrical Component Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors Tray Drives all rollers. Tray Lift Drives the paper tray up or down. Sensors Paper End 1 Informs the copier/printer when the paper in (paper feed side) the right side (paper feed side) of the tray has been used up.

  • Page 637: Paper Feed

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED 2.4 PAPER FEED B457D005.WMF This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism. The paper feed unit consists of the pickup roller [A], paper feed roller [B], separation roller [C], and relay rollers. There is a torque limiter in the back of the separation roller (ferrite powder type). B457 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 638: Separation Roller And Pickup Roller Release

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE 2.5 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE B457D008.WMF B457D009.WMF To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the separation and pickup rollers release automatically. When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from the paper feed roller [C], and the pickup roller [D] stays in the upper position.

  • Page 639: Tray Lift

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY LIFT 2.6 TRAY LIFT B457D010.WMF B457D009.WMF When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray switch on the back turns on and the tray lift motor [B] starts. The base plate lift shaft [C] is coupled to the lift motor at the shaft [D], so the base plate [A] of the tray is lifted.

  • Page 640: Paper Amount Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION 2.7 PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION The table lists the sensors that are used to detect Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side Paper End the amount of remaining paper. Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper feed side •...

  • Page 641: Paper End Detection Of Paper Feed Side

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE 2.8 PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE B457D006.WMF B457D007.WMF The paper end sensor 1[A] detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs out. When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the feeler [B] and the actuator enters the sensor.

  • Page 642: Paper Stack Transport

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER STACK TRANSPORT 2.9 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT B457D004.WMF When the paper in the paper feed side is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the paper storage side to the paper feed side.

  • Page 643: Auto Reverse Document Feeder

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B386 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 644 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 645 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B386 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS..............1 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................2 1.3 LEFT COVER ....................2 1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER..................3 1.5 FEED BELT ....................3 1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ................
  • Page 646 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 647: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols. ...

  • Page 648: Original Feed Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL FEED UNIT 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT B386R500.WMF 1. Open the left cover. 2. Detach the paper feed unit by sliding it toward the front of the machine (spring- loaded side) and then lifting the far side. 1.3 LEFT COVER B386R507.WMF 1.

  • Page 649: Pick-Up Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PICK-UP ROLLER 1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER 1. Original feed unit. 2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1) B386R501.WMF 1.5 FEED BELT 1. Original feed unit 2. Open the paper feed guide [A]. 3. Belt holders [B] 4. Feed belt [C] •...

  • Page 650: Separation Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SEPARATION ROLLER 1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER B386R502.WMF 1. Lift the original feed guide [A]. 2. Separation roller cover [B] 3. Separation roller [C] 1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS B386R201.WMF 1. Open the left cover. 2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B]. 3.

  • Page 651: Original Size Sensors, Trailing Edge Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR 1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR B386R503.WMF B386R504.WMF 1. Open the original table [A]. 2. Upper part of the table ( x 3) 3. Replace the width sensor board [B], length sensor (-1 [C] and -2 [D]) and trailing edge sensor [E].

  • Page 652: Original Feed Drive

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE B386R202.WMF First remove the rear cover. Then follow the instructions below for each part replacement: DF Feed Clutch 1. DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1,  x 1) Pick-up Solenoid 1.

  • Page 653: Registration Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA REGISTRATION SENSOR 1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR B386R508.WMF 1. Front and rear covers 2. Transport guide plate [A] 3. Registration sensor [B] B386 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 654: Stamp Solenoid And Original Exit Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR 1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR B386R509.WMF B386R203.WMF 1. Rear cover ( x 1) 2. Upper cover and the exit tray 3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver into one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and pushing firmly.

  • Page 655: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B386D201.WMF 1. Separation Roller 11. Reverse Roller 2. Paper Feed Belt 12. Junction Gate 3. Pick-up Roller 13. Exit Roller 4. Original Set Sensor 14. Original Exit Sensor 5.

  • Page 656: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B386D202.WMF 1. DF Feed Clutch 10. DF Feed Motor 2. Feed Cover Sensor 11. DF Transport Motor 3. Original Width Sensor Board 12. Original Exit Sensor 4. Original Length Sensor 1 13.

  • Page 657: Electrical Component Description

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors DF Feed Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse table rollers. DF Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers Sensors DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not. Registration Detects the leading edge of the original to turn off the DF feed and transport motors, detects...

  • Page 658: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DRIVE LAYOUT 2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT B386D203.WMF 1. Separation Roller 6. DF Feed Motor 2. Original Feed Belt 7. Reverse Table Roller 3. Pick-up Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller 4. DF Feed Clutch 9. Exit Roller 5. DF Transport Motor 10.

  • Page 659: Original Size Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION B386D503.WMF The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board [A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size of the original.
  • Page 660 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION Original Original Original Width-3 Original Original Width-1 Width-2 Length-1 Length-2 A3 (297 x 420) — — — " B4 (257 x 364) — — — " A4 (Lengthwise) — — — — " (210 x 297) A4 (297 x 210) —...
  • Page 661 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION Original Width Sensor Board GND Pattern Original Width 1 Original Width 2 Original Side Guide Position A3/A4S B4/B5S A4L/A5S B5L/A5L The signal is "L" when the terminal plate is connected to the GND pattern. B386D501.WMF B386 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 662: Mixed Original Size Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE 2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode. Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document length detection method is different.

  • Page 663: Pick-Up And Separation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PICK-UP AND SEPARATION 2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION B386D504.WMF B386D505.WMF The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and the original set sensor [E] is activated. After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate [C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B].

  • Page 664: Original Transport And Exit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS B386D506.WMF The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the motor stops for a short while.

  • Page 665: Double-Sided Originals

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS B386D204.WMF B386D205.WMF When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone reactivates to drive the first [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller [F].

  • Page 666: Original Trailing Edge Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT B386D206.WMF B386D207.WMF The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over. This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [J] in the correct order.

  • Page 667: Stamp

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAMP 2.9 STAMP B386D507.WMF This function is only for fax mode. There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly. When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300 milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission).

  • Page 668: Timing Chart

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TIMING CHART 2.10 TIMING CHART LT SIDEWAYS STAMP MODE (DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE) B386D101.WMF B386 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 669: Condition Of Jam Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION 2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 114 mm x 2 since the feed motor started (twice the distance between the original set position and the (registration sensor).

  • Page 670: Overall Electrical Circuit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction Gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information.

  • Page 671: Service Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DIP SWITCHES 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCHES SW100 Description Normal operating mode (Default) No function Free run with two-sided original 100% DF feed clutch operates Free run with one-sided original 32.6% DF pick-up solenoid operates Motors rotate No function Free run with one-sided original 100% Junction gate solenoid operates...
  • Page 672 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 673: Interchange Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B481 INTERCHANGE UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 674 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 675 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INTERCHANGE UNIT B481 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT..............1 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION ..............2 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............2 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT ........3 2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM..............4 To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge Unit, or the Finisher) ................
  • Page 676 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 677: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 678: Detailed Description

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B481D001.WMF 1. 1-bin Tray (Option) 2. Exit Sensor 3. Duplex Junction Gate 4. Duplex Unit (Option) 5. Exit Junction Gate 6. Fusing Unit (Inside the Copier) 7. Exit Roller 8.

  • Page 679: Electrical Component And Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT B481D503.WMF B481R554.WMF 1. Exit Junction Gate Solenoid 4. Exit Roller 2. Exit Sensor 5. Drive Gear 3. Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid B481 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 680: Junction Gate Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM B481D504.WMF B481D003.WMF B481D002.WMF Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up, left, or right by the exit junction gate [A] and the duplex junction gate [B]. These are controlled by the exit junction gate solenoid [C] and the duplex junction gate solenoid [D].

  • Page 681: Bin Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B480 1-BIN TRAY UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 682 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 683 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL............... 1 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION ..............2 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............2 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............3 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION..........3 2.4 BASIC OPERATION..................
  • Page 684 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 685: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 686: Detailed Description

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B480D500.WMF B480D501.WMF 1. Exit Rollers 2. Junction Gate Gear 3. Drive Gear 4. Paper Tray 5. Paper Sensor 6. Junction Gate (Interchange Unit) B480 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 687: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B480D004.WMF 1. Paper Sensor 2. 1-bin Sorter Exit Tray LED (located in the copier) 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Sensors Paper Detects whether there is paper on the tray. LEDs 1 Bin Exit Tray Indicates when there is paper in the tray.

  • Page 688: Basic Operation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BASIC OPERATION 2.4 BASIC OPERATION B480D502.WMF B480D004.WMF At the appropriate time after the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper reaches the copier’s registration roller, the junction gate solenoid [A] in the interchange unit turns on to switch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray [B].

  • Page 689: Shift Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B510 SHIFT TRAY UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 690 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 691 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT ..............1 1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL..............1 1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT ............1 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT ....2 1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ............
  • Page 692 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 693: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 694: Tray Motor And Half Turn Sensor Replacement

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT B510R101.WMF 1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR 1. Slip disc [A] 2. Tray motor [B] ( x 1) 1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR 1.

  • Page 695: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT B510D151.WMF B510D102.WMF 1. Half Turn Sensor 2. Tray Cover 3. Slip Disc 4. Tray Motor 5. Driver PCB B510 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 696: Basic Operation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BASIC OPERATION 2.2 BASIC OPERATION B510D500.WMF The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray. From the left-right movement of the tray cover [A], the piles of copies are offset into two positions, slightly overlapping one another. B510 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 697: Tray Shift

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRIMARY MECHANISMS 2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS 2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT B510D101.WMF As stated above, the shift tray [A] moves from left to right to create two possible positions for the copies to stack up. This motion is driven by the tray motor [B], which connects to the slip disc [C] via a small shaft.

  • Page 698: Half Turn Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PRIMARY MECHANISMS 2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION B510D101.WMF Half turn detection is performed through a combination of two components: the slip disc [A] and half turn sensor [C]. The slip disc has a rim extending below the top surface. However, the rim only extends 180°...
  • Page 699 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B490 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 700 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 701 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 PICKUP/FEED ROLLER ................1 1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ................2 1.3 REVERSE ROLLER ..................2 1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD..............3 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............4 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............
  • Page 702 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 703: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PICKUP/FEED ROLLER 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 704: Paper Feed Clutch

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1. Upper cover (! 1.1) 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 1) 3. Gear holder [B] ( x 3) 4. Gears [C][D] B490R153.WMF 5. Clutch [E] ( x 1) B490R104.WMF 1.3 REVERSE ROLLER 1.

  • Page 705: Paper Size Sensor Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD 1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD 1. Paper tray [A] ( x 2) 2. Rear cover [B] ( x 1) B490R001.WMF 3. Paper size sensor board [C] B490R002.WMF Reassembling 1. Move the side fences to the centermost positions [D]. 2.

  • Page 706: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B490D101.WMF 9. Reverse roller 1. Registration roller (copier) 2. Registration guide 10. Paper path (optional paper tray) 3. Paper end sensor 11. Paper path (bypass tray) 4. Feeler link 12.

  • Page 707: Paper Feed

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED 2.2 PAPER FEED 2.2.1 DRIVE B490D103.WMF Power Source The paper feed motor [A] inside the copier drives all the rollers and gears in the bypass tray unit by way of a timing belt and gears. The transport roller gear [F] (in the copier) contacts the leftmost gear [B] (in the bypass unit).

  • Page 708: Paper Feed Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED 2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM B490D104.WMF Pickup Roller Mechanism When paper is not being fed, the pickup roller [B] stays away from the paper stack. When paper feed starts, the pickup solenoid [A] turns on and lowers the pickup roller by way of a mechanical link.

  • Page 709: Paper Size Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER SIZE DETECTION 2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION B490D554.WMF The side fences [A] are mechanically linked with the gear on the paper size sensor board [B]. The gear turns when the fences are moved. The gear has terminals which make different electric circuits when the gear is turned, so the machine determines the width of the paper in the by-pass tray by the signals from the paper size sensor board.
  • Page 710 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 711: Duplex Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B509 DUPLEX UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 712 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 713 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DUPLEX UNIT B509 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ..................1 1.2 ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS ..............1 1.3 INVERTER MOTOR ..................2 1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD ................2 1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR ................. 2 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............3 2.1 OVERVIEW ....................
  • Page 714 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 715: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXTERIOR COVER 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 716: Inverter Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INVERTER MOTOR 1.3 INVERTER MOTOR 1. Exterior cover (! 1.1) 2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3) B509R103.WMF 1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD 1. Exterior cover (! 1.1) 2. Controller board [A] ( x 5,  x 3) B509R104.WMF 1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR 1.

  • Page 717: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERVIEW 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 OVERVIEW B509D101.WMF 1. Interchange unit 5. Inverter roller 2. Paper entrance 6. Inverter section 3. Inverter gate 7. Exit sensor 4. Entrance sensor 8. Paper exit path B509 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 718: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B509D102.WMF 1. Entrance sensor 5. Inverter motor 2. Duplex unit open switch 6. Controller board 3. Inverter gate solenoid 7. Transport motor 4. Cover sensor 8. Exit sensor B509 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 719: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DRIVE LAYOUT 2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT B509D103.WMF 1. Inverter motor 2. Transport motor B509 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 720: Duplex Paper Feed Order

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER 2.4 DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER 2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF The feed path through the duplex unit can only hold one sheet of paper. The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.

  • Page 721: Up To A4/Lt Lef

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER 2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF The feed path through the duplex unit can hold 2 sheets of paper The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.

  • Page 722: Reverse Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA REVERSE MECHANISM 2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM B509D104.WMF The duplex unit starts when the entrance sensor [E] detects paper coming in. 1. Duplex junction gate [A] in the interchange unit Directs the paper to the duplex unit (up to A3 SEF) 2.

  • Page 723: Bridge Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B482 BRIDGE UNIT CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 724 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 725 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BRIDGE UNIT B482 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........1 1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............2 1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............. 2 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............3 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............3 2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ...................
  • Page 726 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 727: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols. ...

  • Page 728: Tray Exit Sensor Replacement

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT B482R104.WMF 1. Bridge unit (! Installation Procedure in the base copier manual) 2. Rear cover (! 1.1) 3. Paper tray [A] 4. Exit guide [B] ( x 2) 5.

  • Page 729: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B482D500.WMF 1. Upper Exit Roller 6. 2nd Transport Roller 2. Tray Exit Sensor 7. 3rd Transport Roller 3. Junction Gate 8. Left Exit Roller 4. Cooling Fan 9.

  • Page 730: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DRIVE LAYOUT 2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT B482D502.WMF 1. Left Exit Roller 2. 2nd Transport Roller 3. 1st Transport Roller 4. Upper Exit Roller 5. 3rd Transport Roller Bridge Unit Drive Motor B482 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 731: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B482D501.WMF 1. Left Guide Switch 5. Cooling Fan Motor 2. Right Guide Switch 6. Relay Sensor 3. Junction Gate Solenoid 7. Bridge Unit Drive Motor 4. Tray Exit Sensor 8. Bridge Unit Control Board B482 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 732: Electrical Component Description

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit. Drive Motor Drives the bridge unit. Sensors Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. Relay Checks for misfeeds. Switches Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened.

  • Page 733: Junction Gate Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM B482D104.WMF The junction gate [B] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been selected.
  • Page 734 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 735: Sheet Finisher

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B408 1000-SHEET FINISHER CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 736 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 737 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 MAIN PCB ....................1 1.2 STAPLER UNIT.................... 2 1.3 MOTORS...................... 3 1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR..................3 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR ................3 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ......4 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR ............
  • Page 738 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 739: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MAIN PCB 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws ...

  • Page 740: Stapler Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAPLER UNIT 1.2 STAPLER UNIT 1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Open exit guide plate [B] 3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2) B408R102.WMF 4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1) 5. Front cover [E] 6.

  • Page 741: Motors

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MOTORS 1.3 MOTORS 1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR 1. Rear cover (!1.1) 2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B408R123.WMF 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR 1. Rear cover (!1.1) 2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B408R124.WMF B408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 742: Upper Transport Motor And Exit Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MOTORS 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1. Rear cover (!1.1) 2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4,  x 2) 3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4) 4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4) B408R112.WMF 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1.

  • Page 743: Motors And Sensors

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.1 PREPARATION 1. Front cover and inner cover (!1.2) 2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1) B408R116.WMF 4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2) 5.

  • Page 744: Stack Height Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x 2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1) B408R121.WMF 1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1) B408R120.WMF B408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 745: Lower Tray Lift Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B408R119.WMF 1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR 1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B408R122.WMF B408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 746: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JAM DETECTION 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 JAM DETECTION Mode Content Shift Staple Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on On check within the normal time after the main " " machine exit sensor turns on Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off "...

  • Page 747: Service Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in the table below. SW100 Description Normal operation mode (Default) Packing mode. • Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero.

  • Page 748: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA GENERAL LAYOUT 4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT B408D101.WMF 1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler 2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt 3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller 4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller 5. Upper Transport Roller 12.

  • Page 749: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B408D102.WMF B408D103.WMF 1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor 2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid 3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor 4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15.
  • Page 750 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B408D104.WMF 22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 23. Lower Tray Lift Motor 24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25. Stapler Motor 26. Jogger Fence Motor 27. Stack Feed-out Motor 28. Main Board 29. Lower Transport Motor 30.

  • Page 751: Electrical Component Description

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport Transport rollers. Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the Transport positioning roller. Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer.
  • Page 752 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Positioning Moves the positioning roller. SOL3 Roller Switches Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit Upper Limit position. Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is Safety opened.

  • Page 753: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DRIVE LAYOUT 4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT B408D106.WMF B408D105.WMF B408D107.WMF 1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor 2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor 3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor 4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor 5.

  • Page 754: Junction Gates

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JUNCTION GATES 4.5 JUNCTION GATES B408D108.WMF Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B]. These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler junction gate solenoid [D].

  • Page 755: Upper Tray

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA UPPER TRAY 4.6 UPPER TRAY B408D109.WMF When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected. B408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 756: Lower Tray Up/Down Mechanisms

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS B408D112.WMF The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.

  • Page 757: Paper Shift Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM 4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM B408D110.WMF In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of copies. The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the shift gear disk [C].

  • Page 758: Jogger Unit Paper Positioning Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM 4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM B408D113.WMF B408D114.WMF In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when it arrives in the jogger unit. For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C] pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].

  • Page 759: Exit Guide Plate

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXIT GUIDE PLATE 4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE B408D111.WMF When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A] is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers.

  • Page 760: Stapler Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAPLER MECHANISM 4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM B408D116.WMF The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer. The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at the stapling position.

  • Page 761: Stapler Unit Movement Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM 4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM B408D117.WMF The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position. If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling position first, then moves to the rear stapling position.

  • Page 762: Paper Feed-Out Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM 4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM B408D118.WMF After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds it to the shift roller.
  • Page 763 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B458 500-SHEET FINISHER CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 764 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 765 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 500-SHEET FINISHER B458 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 EXTERIOR ....................1 Front Cover....................2 1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT......... 4 1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE ............... 5 1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID ......5 1.5 STAPLER UNIT....................
  • Page 766 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 767: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXTERIOR 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws  : Connector ...

  • Page 768: Front Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXTERIOR Front Cover [A]: : Front cover ( x 1) B458R101.WMF Rear Cover [B]: Rear cover ( x 1) B458R102.WMF Top Cover [C]: Top cover (2 links) B458R105.WMF B458 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 769 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA EXTERIOR Front Lower Guide B458R116.WMF B458R104.WMF [A]: Output tray ( x 2) [B]: Front lower guide ( x 2) NOTE: 1) When re-attaching the lower guide, be sure that it is not in contact with the exit lower guide and that the exit lower guide moves smoothly. 2) Make sure that the blue and black cables are in the correct position, as engraved on the inside of the front lower guide.

  • Page 770: Entrance Upper Guide/Paper Exit Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT 1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT B458R106.WMF • Front, rear, and top covers and front lower guide (! 1.1 Exterior) [A]: Entrance upper guide ( x 2,  x 1) [B]: Paddle gear spring [C]: Paddle gear (...

  • Page 771: Entrance Lower Guide

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE 1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE • Entrance upper guide (! 1.2 Entrance upper guide/Exit unit) • Exit unit (!1.2 Entrance upper guide/ Exit unit) [A]: Release tension bracket ( x 1) [B]: Reverse roller gear bracket ( x 2) [C]: Timing belt [D]: Entrance lower guide NOTE: When re-attaching the tension...

  • Page 772: Stapler Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA STAPLER UNIT 1.5 STAPLER UNIT • Rear cover (! 1.1 Exterior) [A]: Stapler unit bracket ( x 2,  x 1) [B]: Stapler unit ( x 3) B458R115.WMF 1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT • Entrance upper guide and paper exit unit (! 1.2 Entrance upper guide / paper exit unit) •...

  • Page 773: Paper Exit Sensor Feeler

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER 1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER • Jogger tray unit (! 1.6 Jogger tray unit) • Jogger motor (! 1.9 Jogger motor) [A]: Paper exit sensor feeler B458R121.WMF 1.8 MAIN MOTOR • Right cover (! 1.1 Exterior) [A]: Release tension bracket (...

  • Page 774: Jogger Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA JOGGER MOTOR 1.9 JOGGER MOTOR • Front lower guide (! 1.1 Exterior) [A]: Jogger motor ( x 2,  x 3) B458R114.WMF 1.10 CONTROL BOARD • Front lower guide (! 1.1 Exterior) [A]: Control board ( x 1,  x 12) B458R112.WMF B458 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 775: Output Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OUTPUT TRAY UNIT 1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT B458R118.WMF B458R117.WMF B458R119.WMF [A]: Output tray cover ( x 2) [B]: Tray holder ( x 1) [C]: Links [D]: Connector cover [E]: Output tray motor link unit ( x 1) [F]: Rear cover (...

  • Page 776: Detailed Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Mechanical Component Layout B458D101.WMF 1. Output tray 6. Lower entrance guide 2. Stack height detection lever 7. Upper entrance guide 3. Paper exit roller 8.

  • Page 777: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Drive Layout B458D103.WMF 1. Main motor 5. Output tray link gears 2. Exit roller timing belt 6. Paper exit unit drive gear 3. Main motor timing belt 7. Reverse roller 4. Output tray motor 8.

  • Page 778: Electrical Component Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B458D102.WMF See the next page for the component description table. B458 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 779 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Symbols Name Function Index No. Motors Main Drives all the rollers Jogger Drives the jogger fence Output Tray Drives the tray up and down Stapler Drives the stapler Sensors Entrance Detects paper at the entrance Exit Detects paper at the exit...

  • Page 780: Detailed Section Descriptions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM Stack Height Detection B458D104.WMF Stack height detection lever [A]: Driven by stack height lever solenoid [B]. Two sensors detect the height of the stack in the output tray: the stack height [C] and lever [D] sensors.

  • Page 781: Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism B458D105.WMF Overview The output tray motor gear [A] lifts/lowers the tray if the stack height is not at the target position. Gears [B] and [C] keep the angle of the tray constant at any tray position. Output Tray Downward Movement The top of the paper stack is checked after every page (or set of pages) has been fed out.

  • Page 782: Paper Feed

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.2 PAPER FEED Straight Feed Out Mode B458D109.WMF B458D106.WMF Before the job, the exit unit [A] is up, and the exit unit gear solenoid [B] is on, pulling lever [C] away from the exit unit gear [D]. At the start of the job, the stack height detection lever detects the top of the stack.

  • Page 783: Shift Sorting Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS Shift Sorting Mode B458D111.WMF B458D113.WMF At the start of the job, and for odd numbered sets of copies, the mechanism is the same as the straight feed out mode. However, even numbered sets are fed back to the jogger tray, which shifts the sets to one side before feeding them out.
  • Page 784 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS B458D107.WMF After the paper reaches the end fence [A], the jogger fence [B] shifts the paper across. The jogger motor [C] drives the jogger fence. The home position sensor [D] detects when the jogger fence has returned to home position. When the next set begins, the paper exit unit moves down, and the machine operates the same way as straight feed out mode.

  • Page 785: Stapling Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS Stapling Mode B458D112.WMF B458D114.WMF B458D106.WMF The stapler is attached to the jogger tray, so all sets go to the jogger tray. After all pages of a set have entered the jogger tray and been shifted across, the paper exit link [A] pulls the paper exit unit [B] down until knob [C] on the exit unit pushes the link lever [D] for the exit unit switch [E].

  • Page 786: Jam Conditions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS Sensors Conditions Remaining paper detection Entrance Either the entrance or exit sensor detects Exit paper just after the unit is initialized. Non-feed at the entrance The entrance sensor is not activated within a Entrance certain period after the paper exit sensor detects paper.
  • Page 787 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 788 SAVIN – C2408/C3210 SUBJECT: ILLUSTRATION CORRECTION – TRANSFER ROLLER GENERAL: The following illustration change is being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. The orientation of the bearings (Index #19; Page 28) shown below should be reversed. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...
  • Page 789 The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow • 3-24 Updated Information (Transfer Roller) • 3-43 Updated Information (EX I/O Board) • 3-46 through 3-52 Updated Information (Electrical Components and Drive Units) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
  • Page 790 3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER 1. Brace [A] ( x 1) 2. Guide [B] NOTE: To remove the screws, turn the roller unit on its pivot. 3. Transfer roller [C] x 2, Bushing x 2, Bearing x 2) B051R403.WMF B051/B052 3-24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 791 3) 6. I/O board [E] ( x 29, x 4) B051R801.WMF 3.10.2 EX I/O BOARD ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1) 2. Ex I/O board [A] ( x 14, x 4) B051R802.WMF 3-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 792 4. Duct [C] with bracket [D] x 1, x 1) 5. Oil tank holder [E] ( x 2) 6. Bracket [F] ( x 2) B051R814.WMF 7. Power supply unit [G] x 10, x 6) B051R815.WMF B051/B052 3-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 793 C and M Development Units 1. Flywheel [A] ( x 3) 2. Unhook the locks [B] and pull out the clutches [C] ( x 1). NOTE: When reassembling, connect the cyan clutch connector to the blue coupler [D]. B051R804.WMF 3-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 794 3. Development motor [A] x 1, x 3) B051R805.WMF 3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1). 2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3) 3. Main motor [B] ( x 1, x 3) B051R806.WMF B051/B052 3-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 795 B051R807.WMF drive power to the gear box. 3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ⇒ 1. Open the controller box ( 3.10.1). 2. Fusing unit motor [A] ( x 1, x 3) B051R808.WMF 3-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 796 4. Pull out the handle [A]. 5. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6) 6. Paper feed motor [B] with gears x 1, x 5) NOTE: When reassembling, make sure the vertical transport clutch is in position. B051R810.WMF B051/B052 3-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 797 1, x 2) B051R812.WMF 3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1. Loosen the screws on the paper feed clutch 1 ( 3.11.6). 2. Unhook the lock [A] and pull the clutch out [B] ( x 1). B051R809.WMF 3-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 798 [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine. 3. Oil pump bracket [D] ( x 3) 4. Oil pump [E] ( x 2, x 1) Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump. B051/B052 3-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 799 9,10,11; SP 1 –002 # 1 and SP 1 – 003 # 5,6,7. If adjustments are necessary for the Duplex unit, use SP 1- 001 # 12; SP 1-002 # 6, SP 1-003 #8. See B051/B052 Service Manual pages 5-4 and 5-5 for descriptions of the above SP Modes.
  • Page 800 The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. ⇒ The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow PAGES: • 1-51 Updated Information (Key Counter Installation) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
  • Page 801 2. Remove the upper right cover [B] ( x 1). 3. Remove the cap [C]. 4. Install the bracket [D] ( x 2). ⇒ 5. Connect the cable [E] to the EX I/O board CN 379 and route it as shown. 1-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 802 2.00 B051_52_BICU_Service Pack.exe Printer 2.00 B051_52_Printer_Service Pack.exe 3.07 B051_52_Printer_Service Pack.exe 1.66 B051_52_Printer_Service Pack.exe Scanner 2.00 B051_52_Scanner_PS3_Service Pack.exe Delivery 2.00 B051_52_Scanner_PS3_Service Pack.exe BICU 1.233 B051_52_BICU_Service Pack.exe CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  Page 1 of 1 Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
  • Page 803 1. Clean the attachment surface on the Front Side Fence (AF016097) with alcohol. 2. Attach the Mylar (G0702735) to the Front Side Fence as shown in the illustration. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2...
  • Page 804 Z-folds and a lower value tends to cause paper jams. NOTE: It is recommended after the mylars are installed that the paper buckle adjustment is set back to normal. GENERAL: The following part update is being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION PAGE...
  • Page 805 SAVIN – C2408/C3210 SUBJECT: CHARGE CORONA ASSEMBLY/PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT GENERAL: The following parts updates are being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. Charge Corona Assembly: The following changes have been applied to the production line to ensure even image density: •...
  • Page 806 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 007 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Protection Sheet REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE ITEM B0512210 B0519100 Photo Conductor Unit 1 - 1 B0512151 B0512160 Charge Corona Assembly 1 - 1 G0702178 G0702110...
  • Page 807 LANIER – LD024C/LD032C RICOH – AFICIO 1224C/1232C SAVIN – C2408/C3210 SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL: The following parts updates are being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. • UPDATE 1: Page 8 & 9: • Delete Index #44 Operate Mask Decal.
  • Page 808 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 008 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • UPDATE 2: Page 18 & 19: • To improve image quality, a shading plate has been added for filtering out excessive light. Shading Plate REFERENCE NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION...
  • Page 809 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 008 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • Page 28 & 29: UPDATE 3: • Updated Part Number for Index # 16 & 21 • Add Index # 34 Grid Shading Plate • Reduce the quantity for index #6 from 2 to 1 •...
  • Page 810 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 008 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • Page 48 & 49: UPDATE 3: • Updated Part Numbers for Index # 20 Power Supply Unit (120v & 22v units.) • Add Index # 26 CSS Bracket REFERENCE OLD PART NO.
  • Page 811 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 008 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • UPDATE 3: Page 52 & 53: • Updated Part Numbers for Index # 29 Power Pack BCTCLD; The power packs for each models B051and B052, were previously separate parts, the power pack are standardized to AZ320117 and can be used in both machines.
  • Page 812 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 008 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • UPDATE 3: Page 54 & 55: • Updated Part Number for Index #106 Harness Clamp Page 58 & 59: • Updated Part Number for Index #107 Harness Clamp 24. DRIVE SECTION 1 (B051/B052) 26.
  • Page 813 The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow PAGES: • 5-5 through 5-7 Updated Information (Service Program Mode) • 5-10 through 5-15 Updated Information (Service Program Mode) • 5-17 through 5-18 Updated Information (Service Program Mode) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
  • Page 814 ⇒ Color in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1°C/step] Heating: Duplex/1 Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing ⇒ Color (both sides) in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 150 / 1°C/step] B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 815 [0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step] Pressure Roller Type Pressure Roller Type 0: 2.1 mm Type (New) 1: 1.5 mm Type (Old) Exit Full Timer Exit Full Timer [10 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step] DFU B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 816 A3. A4 SEF will be detected as A4. If the setting is 1 (LEF): The machine will detect A4LEF as A4. However, if A4 SEF is placed in the bypass tray, it will be detected as A5. B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 817 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 12.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 20.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/210-256 B051/B052 5-10 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 818 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 17.0 / 0.1 µA/step] OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 21.0 / 0.1 µA/step] OHP/210 5-11 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 819 [0 ~ 70.0 / 29.0 / 0.1 µA/step] [0 ~ 70.0 / 30.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 31.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 30.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Normal/1st/129-209 B051/B052 5-12 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 820 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 15.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 15.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 14.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5-13 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 821 Adjusts the paper transfer current at the paper edges. edge [10.0 ~ 20.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 times/step] DFU Normal/2nd/Leading The specified values indicate how many times larger the edge current at the edge is. Thick/1st/Leading edge Thick/2nd/Leading edge OHP/Leading edge Normal/1st/Trailing edge B051/B052 5-14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 822 [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] Colors ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step] Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 5-15 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 823 • 400 images or less are created after the machine starts. 1C Bias Adjustment Default 50V DFU Default 0V DFU Default 0V DFU ⇒ Default 0V DFU Paper Transfer Roller Type Paper Transfer Roller 0: Drum Type (New) Type 1: Straight Type (Old) 5-17 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 824 • 0: Disables 1: Enables When high coverage images are continuously printed, cleaning of the OPC may not be enough. To correct this, OPC lubrication is carried out during printing (lubrication time: around 34 seconds). B051/B052 5-18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 825 SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - FUSING UNIT ASSEMBLY GENERAL: The following parts updates are being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. Supplemental Information: For clarification on the structural makeup of the Fusing Unit Assembly and its components, please refer to the diagram below.
  • Page 826 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Illustration corrections (pg. 36, 38 & 40): 15. FUSING UNIT 1 (pg. 36) Indices 2 and 101 are not part of index 24. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO.
  • Page 827 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 16. FUSING UNIT 2 (pg. 38) 43: New index REFERENCE OLD INDEX NEW INDEX PART DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER G0704005 Fusing Unit – Fusing Belt Assembly CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 828 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 17. FUSING UNIT 3 (pg. 40) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 4 of 4...
  • Page 829 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Illustration corrections (pg. 36, 38 & 40): 15. FUSING UNIT 1 (pg. 36) Indices 2 and 101 are not part of index 24. REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO.
  • Page 830 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 16. FUSING UNIT 2 (pg. 38) 43: New index REFERENCE OLD INDEX NEW INDEX PART DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER G0704005 Fusing Unit – Fusing Belt Assembly CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 831 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 17. FUSING UNIT 3 (pg. 40) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 4 of 4...
  • Page 832 CN6 (Slot 1): Printer / Scanner controller ROM DIMM Software performance error CN8 (Slot 3): NIB ROM DIMM SC819: CN8 (Slot 3): NIB ROM DIMM Kernel abnormal end error CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1...
  • Page 833 B051_52_BICU_Service Pack.exe Delivery 2.00 B051_MFPSP_V201F.exe EFFECTED SERIAL NUMBERS: Please verify the serial numbers that are effected on the chart located on page 2 of this TSB. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2...

  • Page 834: Serial Number

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 012 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Prod. Prod. Prod. Prod. Prod. SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL Code Code Code Code Code NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER B051 J2536200721 B051 J2536200920 B052 J2636200859 B052 J2636200971 B052 J2636201072...
  • Page 835 PAGE ITEM G0702717 G0702718 Rear Lever - Stopper UNITS AFFECTED: All B051/B052 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Rear Lever - Stopper installed during production. MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc224 J2527200079 Lanier LD024c Ricoh...
  • Page 836 TROUBLESHOOTING ..................4 UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY AT THE SIDE OF THE IMAGE ......6 BLACK AND WHITE DOTS ................7 DIRTY BACKGROUND..................8 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright     2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 8...

  • Page 837: Uneven Image Density In The Subscan Direction

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY IN THE SUBSCAN DIRECTION (INCLUDING BLACK/WHITE LINES) Image Samples Sample 1 (Uneven image density caused by dirty charge unit) Paper Feed Direction Sample 2 (Uneven image density caused by scratch on the OPC belt)
  • Page 838 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Samples continued Sample 4 (White line caused by toner on the development roller Paper Feed Direction Sample 5 (Uneven image density caused by toner filming on the development roller)

  • Page 839: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 TROUBLESHOOTING Please use the following flowchart to take action in response to the six image problems on pages 2 and 3. Print the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color...
  • Page 840 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 Make 5 copies of the C4 (Color) test chart From previous page Does a cyan line appear in Does the white line appear on side a yellow image? the test pattern?

  • Page 841: Uneven Image Density At The Side Of The Image

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY AT THE SIDE OF THE IMAGE Print out the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Remove the toner cartridge showing the problem. Shake the cartridge well (10 times), hold the cartridge so that the...

  • Page 842: Black And White Dots

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 BLACK AND WHITE DOTS Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Do black/white Clean the scanner unit exposure glass dots appear? Does the image problem Check the surface of the development roller showing the problem.

  • Page 843: Dirty Background

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 DIRTY BACKGROUND Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Does dirty Clean the scanner unit exposure glass. background appear? Does the image problem Turn the development roller showing occur on all colors? background in the reverse direction (2 times).
  • Page 844 LIGHT COPIES, WHITE LINES, FAINT IMAGES, UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY ..........9 CYAN LINES IN YELLOW BACKGROUND AREAS, CYAN SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS............................13 DIRTY SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS.............15 OTHERS..............................16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 16...

  • Page 845: Uneven Image Density In The Subscan Direction (Including Black/White Lines)

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY IN THE SUBSCAN DIRECTION (INCLUDING BLACK/WHITE LINES) Image Samples Sample 1 (Uneven image density caused by dirty charge unit) Paper Feed Direction Sample 2 (Uneven image density caused by scratch on the OPC belt)
  • Page 846 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Samples continued Sample 4 (White line caused by toner on the development roller Paper Feed Direction Sample 5 (Uneven image density caused by toner filming on the development...

  • Page 847: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE TROUBLESHOOTING Please use the following flowchart to take action in response to the six image problems on pages 2 and 3. Print the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each...
  • Page 848 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE Make 5 copies of the C4 (Color) test chart From previous page Does a cyan line appear in Does a white line appear on side a yellow image? the test pattern?

  • Page 849: Uneven Image Density At The Side Of The Image

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY AT THE SIDE OF THE IMAGE Print out the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Remove the toner cartridge showing the problem. Shake the cartridge well (10 times), hold the cartridge so that the...

  • Page 850: Black And White Dots

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE BLACK AND WHITE DOTS Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Do black/white Clean the scanner unit exposure glass dots appear? Check the surface of the development roller...

  • Page 851: Dirty Background

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE DIRTY BACKGROUND Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Does dirty Clean the scanner unit exposure glass. background appear? Does the image problem Turn the development roller showing occur on all colors? background in the reverse direction (2 times).

  • Page 852: Light Copies, White Lines, Faint Images, Uneven Image Density

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LIGHT COPIES, WHITE LINES, FAINT IMAGES, UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY SYMPTOM: Light copies, white lines, faint images, uneven image density (KMCY) from Cyan toner dropping. Cyan toner drops from the development unit onto the toner shield glass of the LD unit, which may cause the outputs to show uneven image density, faint images, or white lines (depending on the amount of fallen toner).
  • Page 853 B0519100 → B0529100. Field Countermeasure: Refer to this Technical Service Bulletin for the troubleshooting. Refer to TSB B051/B052 - 030 for the action necessary when installing the new and old PCUs in the field. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 10 of 16...
  • Page 854 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SYMPTOM: White lines or uneven image density due to toner clumps in the development unit (Sample Uneven image density from development roller filming (Sample 5) due to an insufficient amount of OPC lubricant.
  • Page 855 Blank area, faint image or uneven image density on one side of the copy (front or rear side of the Development Unit). In contrast to the black faint images described in TSB B051/B052 - 021, this symptom appears only on the development unit front or rear side, as shown below. See TSB B051/B052 - 015 for more information.

  • Page 856: Cyan Lines In Yellow Background Areas, Cyan Spots/Lines In Background And Main Image Areas

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CYAN LINES IN YELLOW BACKGROUND AREAS, CYAN SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS SYMPTOM: Cyan lines in yellow background areas (Sample NOTE: Both development and cleaning are performed in the order: KMCY. If the previous cleaning was insufficient, a dirty image will appear on the next development.
  • Page 857 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SYMPTOM: Cyan spots/lines in background and main image areas. NOTE: This does not depend on the color of the background area, but is more visible in background areas than in main image areas.

  • Page 858: Dirty Spots/Lines In Background And Main Image Areas

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DIRTY SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS SYMPTOM: Dirty spots [A] or lines [B] in background and main image areas. NOTE: This does not occur on all toner colors, and is more visible in background areas than in main image areas.

  • Page 859: Others

    A jammed sheet of paper may sometimes get caught in the area between the OPC Belt and ITB in the PCU unit. Paper caught in the PCU SOLUTION: Field Countermeasure: Remove the OPC Belt-Cleaning Unit ( B051/B052 SM Section 3.6.6). Then, remove the paper caught in the PCU. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 16 of 16...
  • Page 860 CYAN LINES IN YELLOW BACKGROUND AREAS, CYAN SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS:............................13 DIRTY SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS:............15 RANDOM PITCHED BANDING: .........................16 WIDE BAND ALONG THE PAPER FEED DIRECTION: ................17 OTHERS:..............................18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 18...

  • Page 861: Uneven Image Density In The Subscan Direction (Including Black/White Lines)

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY IN THE SUBSCAN DIRECTION (INCLUDING BLACK/WHITE LINES): Image Samples Sample 1 (Uneven image density caused by dirty charge unit) Paper Feed Direction Sample 2 (Uneven image density caused by scratch on the OPC belt)
  • Page 862 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Samples continued Sample 4 (White line caused by toner on the development roller Paper Feed Direction Sample 5 (Uneven image density caused by toner filming on the development...

  • Page 863: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE TROUBLESHOOTING: Please use the following flowchart to take action in response to the six image problems on pages 2 and 3. Print the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each...
  • Page 864 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE Make 5 copies of the C4 (Color) test chart From previous page Does a cyan line appear in Does a white line appear on side a yellow image? the test pattern?

  • Page 865: Uneven Image Density At The Side Of The Image

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY AT THE SIDE OF THE IMAGE: Print out the test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Remove the toner cartridge showing the problem. Shake the cartridge well (10 times), hold the cartridge so that the...

  • Page 866: Black And White Dots

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE BLACK AND WHITE DOTS: Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Do black/white Clean the scanner unit exposure glass dots appear? Check the surface of the development roller...

  • Page 867: Dirty Background

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE DIRTY BACKGROUND: Print out test pattern (SP5-955, No.8) for each color. Does dirty Clean the scanner unit exposure glass. background appear? Does the image problem Turn the development roller showing occur on all colors? background in the reverse direction (2 times).

  • Page 868: Light Copies, White Lines, Faint Images, Uneven Image Density

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LIGHT COPIES, WHITE LINES, FAINT IMAGES, UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY: SYMPTOM: Light copies, white lines, faint images, uneven image density (KMCY) from Cyan toner dropping. Cyan toner drops from the development unit onto the toner shield glass of the LD unit, which may cause the outputs to show uneven image density, faint images, or white lines (depending on the amount of fallen toner).
  • Page 869 B0519100 → B0529100. Field Countermeasure: Refer to this Technical Service Bulletin for the troubleshooting. Refer to TSB B051/B052 - 030 for the action necessary when installing the new and old PCUs in the field. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 10 of 18...
  • Page 870 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SYMPTOM: White lines or uneven image density due to toner clumps in the development unit (Sample Uneven image density from development roller filming (Sample 5) due to an insufficient amount of OPC lubricant.
  • Page 871 Blank area, faint image or uneven image density on one side of the copy (front or rear side of the Development Unit). In contrast to the black faint images described in TSB B051/B052 - 021, this symptom appears only on the development unit front or rear side, as shown below. See TSB B051/B052 - 015 for more information.

  • Page 872: Cyan Lines In Yellow Background Areas, Cyan Spots/Lines In Background And Main Image Areas

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CYAN LINES IN YELLOW BACKGROUND AREAS, CYAN SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS: SYMPTOM: Cyan lines in yellow background areas (Sample NOTE: Both development and cleaning are performed in the order: KMCY. If the previous cleaning was insufficient, a dirty image will appear on the next development.
  • Page 873 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SYMPTOM: Cyan spots/lines in background and main image areas. NOTE: This does not depend on the color of the background area, but is more visible in background areas than in main image areas.

  • Page 874: Dirty Spots/Lines In Background And Main Image Areas

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA DIRTY SPOTS/LINES IN BACKGROUND AND MAIN IMAGE AREAS: SYMPTOM: Dirty spots [A] or lines [B] in background and main image areas. NOTE: This does not occur on all toner colors, and is more visible in background areas than in main image areas.

  • Page 875: Random Pitched Banding

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA RANDOM PITCHED BANDING: SYMPTOM: As shown in the illustration, random-pitched banding appearing at random intervals . Random-pitched banding, uneven ID across the image Paper Feed Direction Grounding Brush CAUSE:...

  • Page 876: Wide Band Along The Paper Feed Direction

    Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 014 REISSUE CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA WIDE BAND ALONG THE PAPER FEED DIRECTION: SYMPTOM: A 15mm wide band along the paper feed direction and/or SC205 Charge Corona Cleaning Error. Paper Feed Direction CAUSE: Toner drops from the development unit in between the charge corona cleaner slider and cleaner driving screw.

  • Page 877: Others

    A jammed sheet of paper may sometimes get caught in the area between the OPC Belt and ITB in the PCU unit. Paper caught in the PCU SOLUTION: Field Countermeasure: Remove the OPC Belt-Cleaning Unit ( B051/B052 SM Section 3.6.6). Then, remove the paper caught in the PCU. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Page 18 of 18...
  • Page 878 Front and Rear Side Plates. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright     2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1...
  • Page 879 Then reinstall the unit (s). Be sure the development unit(s) is inserted evenly from front to rear of the machine and is locked behind the tabs on the Front and Rear Side Plates. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2...
  • Page 880 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 015 REISSUE 2. In the production line starting from February 2004, to absorb the shock during toner replacement (CAUSE 2), the production machines include 4-gap absorber seals (P/N: B0511273) stuck on the development unit cover (See illustration below).
  • Page 881 This setting should be done at the next service call. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1...
  • Page 882 B4902581: Bypass feed decal - English B4902582: Bypass feed decal - German B4902583: Bypass feed decal - Italian B4902584: Bypass feed decal - French B4902585: Bypass feed decal - Spanish CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright  2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2...
  • Page 883 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 016 REISSUE Field Countermeasure: 1. Please advise the customer to set the paper size and feed direction before feeding from the bypass tray. 1. Inform the customer that setting SP1-940 from 0 (SEF) to 1 (LEF), will help prevent damage of the fuser the pressure roller or fusing belt when the paper is removed, change this setting only with the customer’s...
  • Page 884 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B051/B052 - - - - 017 B051/B052 05/29/2003 05/29/2003 BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B051/B052 B051/B052 05/29/2003 05/29/2003 APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL...
  • Page 885 Using a Flash Memory Card ...............5-79 Without Using a Flash Memory Card ..........5-80 5.1.10 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) ..........5-81 5.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD................5-82 5.2.1 FIRMWARE ..................5-82 5.2.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..........5-83 Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)............5-83 Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) ..........5-84 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 886 Supplementary Information on Process Control .........6-17 6.5 SCANNING....................6-19 6.5.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-19 6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ................6-20 Book Mode..................6-20 ARDF Mode ..................6-20 6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION............6-21 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ................6-23 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-23 6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM ..............6-24 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 887 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA COPIER (B051/B052) Rev. 05/2003 B051I129.WMF 17. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A] out. 18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover (see ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).
  • Page 888 [0~1/0/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable The setting for SP5-836- 001 has priority. Capture Setting: Deletes the file(s) that could not send to a PC or Cancel Document waiting for sending. 5-41 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 889 Resolution Conversion Dither print image document is sent to the Document for Dither Print Server via the File Format Converter. (Grayscale processing [1~3/0/1] mode) 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x B051/B052 5-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 890 Displays the 1394 device name. [Text up to 13 bytes / NULL / – /step] • Validates/invalidates the cycle master function. Cycle Master [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Invalidates 1: Validates 5-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 891 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Input Check (Controller) [0x00 ∼ 0x07 / – / 1 /step] DFU Input Check (Controller) Default: 00000001 – do not change B051/B052 5-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 892 • 4: SG2 (distributed as a package) Delivery Server Specifies the distribution capability. [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 2 /step] Capability [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Delivery Server Retry Timer All Directory Clear Initializes all directories. 5-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 893 Changes the default settings of dither print image data (Grayscale transferred externally by the DeskTopBinder V2 page processing reference function via the File Format Converter. mode) [0~3/0/1] 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x B051/B052 5-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 894 [0 ∼ 65535 / 25 / 1 /step] Port Number Plug and Play Plug and Play Specifies the Plug and Play setting. [0 ~ 11 / 0 / 1 /step] Select the required setting from the menu. 5-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 895 Debug Serial Touch Panel Correction Touch Panel Displays if the operation panel has been calibrated after an Correction SP5-801 execution. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Not calibrated • 1: Calibrated B051/B052 5-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 896 Density Adjustment Adjusts the density. [–3 ∼ 3 / 0 / 1 /step] –3: Image becomes lighter 3: Image becomes darker This setting changes the development bias and charge corona voltage to adjust the image density. 5-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 897 Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for testing. (Forward) See section 5.1.5 Feed Motor (Reverse) Do not start to check another item before ending the test that is Trans. Motor in progress. (Forward) Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Stamp Solenoid B051/B052 5-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 898 Exit Plate Home Position Tray Shift Home Position Stack Height Tray Lower Limit Paper Limit 500 Fin Entrance 500 Fin Exit 500 Fin Jogger Home Position 500 Fin Top Cover 500 Fin Height 500 Fin Lever 5-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 899 Adjusts the reading position of the ADF. Moves the Adjustment scanner under the glass to a different position. Use this if there is a scratch on the glass. [–10 ∼ 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] B051/B052 5-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 900 Displays other counter values. [–9999 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] A3/DLT Staple 101* Paper Size Counter Displays the counter values for each paper size. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] DLT (11" x 17") 5-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 901 Displays the copy count for each magnification ratio. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Reduce 50% <-->99 % Full Size Enlarge 101% <--> 200% Enlarge 201% <--> 400% Direct Magnification Direct Size Magnification mm (inch) Auto Reduce/Enlarge B051/B052 5-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 902 1 to 21<-->50 1 to 51<-->100 1 to 101<-->300 1 to 301<-->over Job Counter–Copy Mode Sort Displays the job count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Staple Reserve Copy Check Copy 5-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 903 6<-->10 page over 11 pages Document Server–Job Count (File No) Displays document server printing job counts classified 1 file by mode. 2<-->5 files [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] 6<-->10 files Over 11 files B051/B052 5-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 904 [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step] Tray 2: Non Feed Tray 3: Non Feed Tray 4: Non Feed Bypass: Non Feed 1st Relay ON 2nd Relay: ON 3rd Relay: ON Registration (From Tray) 5-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 905: Service Program Mode

    Error Finisher No Response Original Tray by Location Registration Sensor (On Check) Relay Sensor (On Relay Sensor = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9) Check) Inverter Sensor (On Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10) Check) B051/B052 5-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 906 803* PM Counter Number of Displays the number of sheets printed for each current Development unit. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] • For clearing the counters, see SP7-804. Development: M Development: C 5-59 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 907 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] Counter All Clear (except total) Counter All Clear Clears all counters except for SP7-003 and –007. (except total) [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] B051/B052 5-60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 908 Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet. Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet. 5-61 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 909 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-327 counter. Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears the SP7-328 counter.1 Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears all the document server counters, which include: • SP7-301_SP7-304_SP7-305 • SP7-306_SP7-320_SP7-321 • SP7-323 SP7-324_SP7-325 • SP7-326_SP7-327_SP7-328 B051/B052 5-62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 910 Tray 4 Roller By-pass Feed Paper Transfer Unit Replace counter [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Development: M Development: C Development: Y Development: Bk Fusing Unit Charger Waste Toner: OPC Waste Toner: Belt Filter 1 5-63 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 911 Machine Counter Clear Machine Counter Clear Clears the machine counter. Toner End Counter K Toner Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the possible print count after a toner near end. C Toner M Toner Y Toner B051/B052 5-64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 912 Counter 1 For Designer Counter 2 For Designer SP9-XXX: (Etc.) Mode No. Function / [ Setting ] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Discharge Threshold Discharge Threshold [90 ~ 220 / 150 / 0.1 g/m /step] 5-65 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 913: Test Pattern Printing (Sp5-955-1)

    1 dot Grid Pattern – 2 (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot Grid Pattern 1 dot pair Grid Pattern – 2 (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot pair Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) B051/B052 5-66 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 914: Input Check

    Not detected By-pass Tray Set Not set By-pass Paper End Paper is Paper End present By-pass Paper Size Fusing Unit Set Not set Paper is Fusing Exit Paper End present Fusing Oil End Fusing High Temperature 5-67 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 915 Closed Open Bridge Left Cover Closed Open Bank Upper Relay Relay Sensor 3 (optional No paper Paper present paper tray unit) Relay Sensor 4 (optional Bank Lower Relay No paper Paper present paper tray unit) B051/B052 5-68 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 916 Scanner HP sensor Detected Not detected Position Recycle Counter Mechanical Counter Set Not set Counter Set Not set Key Counter Set Not set Shift Tray Home Detected Not detected Position Sensor Platen Cover Detected Not detected Sensor 5-69 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 917: Table 1: Tray 1 And 2 Paper Size

    00100110 HLT LEF Detected None 00000110 Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 Paper height sensor 1 Code Full 11111111 Nearly full 11111110 11111101 Near end 11111100 B051/B052 5-70 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 918: Ardf Input Check (Sp6-007)

    ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 5-71 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 919: Finisher Input Check (Sp6-117)

    500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor Closed Opened 500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor Locked Not Locked B051/B052 5-72 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 920: Output Check

    Lower Paper Feed Tray 2 paper feed clutch Clutch Upper Relay Roller Tray 1 vertical transport clutch Clutch Lower Relay Roller Tray 2 vertical transport clutch Clutch Transfer Motor: Half Main motor: 178 mm/s Speed 5-73 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 921 Paper Transfer: + Paper transfer bias: + Paper Transfer: – Paper transfer bias: – T/B Cleaning: + Image transfer belt cleaning bias: + Discharge: H Discharge plate power supply: H Discharge: L Discharge plate power supply: L B051/B052 5-74 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 922 Ozone Fan: Hi Ozone Fan: Low Bridge Cooling Fan: H Bridge Cooling Fan: L PSU Fan Forced Lubricant The following parts are switched on. O/B cleaning contact clutch T/B cleaning solenoid T/B cleaning contact clutch 5-75 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 923 500 Fin Stapler Motor Staple Hummer 500 Fin Free Run 1 Stapler Gate Sol 500 Fin Free Run 2 Pos. Roller Sol Feed-out Motor Shift Motor Guide Plate Motor Fin Free Run 1 Fin Free Run 2 B051/B052 5-76 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 924: Smc Data Lists (Sp5-990)

    Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest original jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest original jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest original jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest original jam 5-77 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 925 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest paper jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest paper jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest paper jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest paper jam B051/B052 5-78 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 926: Memory All Clear (Sp5-801)

    SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter. Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes. Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID. 5-79 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 927: Without Using A Flash Memory Card

    • Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed from their factory settings. • Do the white level adjustment (☛ Section 3.14 Standard White Density Adjustment) 6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary adjustments. B051/B052 5-80 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 928 B051S540.WMF Sensors Code ❍ ❍ — — — ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ — — ❍ ❍ — — — Other combinations ❍: Activated —: Deactivated 5-81 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 929: Program Download

    In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the following: Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and switch on. The machine boots from the IC card. Download the new firmware. Others: Replace the appropriate PCB. B051/B052 5-82 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 930: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Open SP5-824. 6. Touch EXECUTE to start uploading the NVRAM data. 7. Turn off the main switch, and then remove the IC card. B051S136.WMF 5-83 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 931: Downloading Nvram Data (Sp5-825)

    • If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution halts. B051/B052 5-84 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 932: Software Reset

    NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching System Settings. B051S503.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. 5-85 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 933: Copier Setting Reset

    NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching Copier/Document Server Features. B051S504.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. B051/B052 5-86 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 934: How To Enter User Tools

    In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry. The following SP mode settings will be displayed. • Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1) • Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2) • Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3) • Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4) • Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4) 5-87 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 935: Counter

    If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from the IC card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to ON. BICU Board: SW2 Function ⇒ Machine B052 (32 minute B/W) B051 (24 minute B/W) Type Off: Off: Off: Off: Destination...
  • Page 936 SUBJECT: FIRMWARE UPDATE FOR MLB & SMTP GENERAL: The B051/B052 firmware has been modified to support the MLB (file format converter) and SMTP authentication protocol from February, 2003 production. To do this, a large-scale modification of the core program areas was necessary, eliminating the compatibility of software types from before and after the modification.
  • Page 937 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 018 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NEW SP MODES: The following SP modes have been added (5852-3 to 5853-13) to enable SMTP authentication. Please also see the procedure below on enabling SMTP authentication on machines produced up until January 2003.
  • Page 938 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 - 018 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ENABLING SMTP AUTHENTICATION ON PRE CUT-IN MACHINES Machines from February ’03 production contain firmware with the following defaults already set. However, for cases where customers require SMTP authentication on machines produced up until January 2003, please enable the function with the following procedure.
  • Page 939 SUBJECT: OIL TANK GUIDE GENERAL: To ensure good oil transportability, the inner diameter of the oil tank guide has been changed from 10 mm to 14 mm. The following part update is being issued for all B051/B052 Parts Catalogs. REFERENCE OLD PART NO.
  • Page 940 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 019 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA UNITS AFFECTED: All B051/B052 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Oil Tank Guide installed during production. MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Gestetner DSc224 J2536200661...
  • Page 941 5-41 to 5-46 Updated Information (Table Corrections) • 5-47 to 5-48 Additional Service Codes for SMTP/POP • 5-49 to 5-89 No Change to Information (Only Page Number Has Change) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA  Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
  • Page 942 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B051 DSc224 LD024c Aficio 1224C C2408 B052 DSc232 LD032c Aficio 1232C C3210 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 02/2003 Original Printing CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 943 Using a Flash Memory Card ...............5-80 Without Using a Flash Memory Card ..........5-81 5.1.10 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) ..........5-82 5.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ................5-83 5.2.1 FIRMWARE ..................5-83 5.2.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..........5-84 Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ............5-84 Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) ..........5-85 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 944: Detailed Section Descriptions

    Supplementary Information on Process Control .........6-17 6.5 SCANNING....................6-19 6.5.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-19 6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ................6-20 Book Mode..................6-20 ARDF Mode ..................6-20 6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION............6-21 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ................6-23 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................6-23 6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM ..............6-24 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 945 [0~1/0/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable The setting for SP5-836- 001 has priority. Capture Setting: Deletes the file(s) that could not send to a PC or Cancel Document waiting for sending. 5-41 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 946 Resolution Conversion Dither print image document is sent to the Document for Dither Print Server via the File Format Converter. (Grayscale processing [1~3/0/1] mode) 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x B051/B052 5-42 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 947 Displays the 1394 device name. [Text up to 13 bytes / NULL / – /step] • Validates/invalidates the cycle master function. Cycle Master [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Invalidates 1: Validates 5-43 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 948 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Input Check (Controller) Input Check [0x00 ∼ 0x07 / – / 1 /step] DFU (Controller) Default: 00000001 – do not change B051/B052 5-44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 949 • 4: SG2 (distributed as a package) Delivery Server Specifies the distribution capability. Capability [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 2 /step] Delivery Server Retry [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Timer All Directory Clear Initializes all directories. 5-45 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 950 Changes the default settings of dither print image data (Grayscale transferred externally by the DeskTopBinder V2 page processing reference function via the File Format Converter. mode) [0~3/0/1] 0: 1 x 1: 1/2 x 2: 1/3 x 1/4 x B051/B052 5-46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 951 Input the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. Use up to 127 alphanumeric characters. SMTP Port Number Input the port number used when sending e-mail to the SMTP server. [1~65535 / 25 / 1] 5-47 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 952 POP server. 1: OFF: Allows only normal encryption. 2: ON: Allows only APOP encryption. Time out Setting for Sets the wait time after POP validation until the SMTP mail is sent. [0~10000/ 300 /1 ms] B051/B052 5-48 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 953 Debug Serial Touch Panel Correction Touch Panel Displays if the operation panel has been calibrated after an Correction SP5-801 execution. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Not calibrated • 1: Calibrated 5-49 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 954 Density Adjustment Adjusts the density. [–3 ∼ 3 / 0 / 1 /step] –3: Image becomes lighter 3: Image becomes darker This setting changes the development bias and charge corona voltage to adjust the image density. B051/B052 5-50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 955 Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for testing. (Forward) See section 5.1.5 Feed Motor (Reverse) Do not start to check another item before ending the test that is Trans. Motor in progress. (Forward) Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Stamp Solenoid 5-51 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 956 Exit Plate Home Position Tray Shift Home Position Stack Height Tray Lower Limit Paper Limit 500 Fin Entrance 500 Fin Exit 500 Fin Jogger Home Position 500 Fin Top Cover 500 Fin Height 500 Fin Lever B051/B052 5-52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 957 Adjusts the reading position of the ADF. Moves the Adjustment scanner under the glass to a different position. Use this if there is a scratch on the glass. [–10 ∼ 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] 5-53 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 958 Displays other counter values. [–9999 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] A3/DLT Staple 101* Paper Size Counter Displays the counter values for each paper size. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step] DLT (11" x 17") B051/B052 5-54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 959 Displays the copy count for each magnification ratio. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Reduce 50% <-->99 % Full Size Enlarge 101% <--> 200% Enlarge 201% <--> 400% Direct Magnification Direct Size Magnification mm (inch) Auto Reduce/Enlarge 5-55 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 960 1 to 21<-->50 1 to 51<-->100 1 to 101<-->300 1 to 301<-->over Job Counter–Copy Mode Sort Displays the job count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Staple Reserve Copy Check Copy B051/B052 5-56 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 961 6<-->10 page over 11 pages Document Server–Job Count (File No) 1 file Displays document server printing job counts classified by mode. 2<-->5 files [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] 6<-->10 files Over 11 files 5-57 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 962 [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step] Tray 2: Non Feed Tray 3: Non Feed Tray 4: Non Feed Bypass: Non Feed 1st Relay ON 2nd Relay: ON 3rd Relay: ON Registration (From Tray) B051/B052 5-58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 963 Error Finisher No Response Original Tray by Location Registration Sensor (On Check) Relay Sensor (On Relay Sensor = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9) Check) Inverter Sensor (On Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10) Check) 5-59 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 964 803* PM Counter Number of Displays the number of sheets printed for each current Development unit. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] • For clearing the counters, see SP7-804. Development: M Development: C B051/B052 5-60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 965 [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] Counter All Clear (except total) Counter All Clear Clears all counters except for SP7-003 and –007. (except total) [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] 5-61 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 966 Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet. Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet. B051/B052 5-62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 967 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-327 counter. Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears the SP7-328 counter.1 Memory Clear Memory Clear Clears all the document server counters, which include: • SP7-301_SP7-304_SP7-305 • SP7-306_SP7-320_SP7-321 • SP7-323 SP7-324_SP7-325 • SP7-326_SP7-327_SP7-328 5-63 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 968 Tray 4 Roller By-pass Feed Paper Transfer Unit Replace counter [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Development: M Development: C Development: Y Development: Bk Fusing Unit Charger Waste Toner: OPC Waste Toner: Belt Filter 1 B051/B052 5-64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 969 Machine Counter Clear Machine Counter Clear Clears the machine counter. Toner End Counter K Toner Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the possible print count after a toner near end. C Toner M Toner Y Toner 5-65 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 970 Counter 1 For Designer Counter 2 For Designer SP9-XXX: (Etc.) Mode No. Function / [ Setting ] (Class 1, 2, and 3) Discharge Threshold Discharge Threshold [90 ~ 220 / 150 / 0.1 g/m /step] B051/B052 5-66 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 971 1 dot Grid Pattern – 2 (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot Grid Pattern 1 dot pair Grid Pattern – 2 (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 1 dot pair Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 5-67 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 972 Not detected By-pass Tray Set Not set By-pass Paper End Paper is Paper End present By-pass Paper Size Fusing Unit Set Not set Fusing Exit Paper is Paper End present Fusing Oil End Fusing High Temperature B051/B052 5-68 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 973 Closed Open Bridge Left Cover Closed Open Bank Upper Relay Relay Sensor 3 (optional No paper Paper present paper tray unit) Bank Lower Relay Relay Sensor 4 (optional No paper Paper present paper tray unit) 5-69 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 974 Scanner HP sensor Detected Not detected Position Recycle Counter Mechanical Counter Set Not set Counter Set Not set Key Counter Set Not set Shift Tray Home Detected Not detected Position Sensor Platen Cover Detected Not detected Sensor B051/B052 5-70 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 975 00100110 HLT LEF Detected None 00000110 Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 Paper height sensor 1 Code Full 11111111 Nearly full 11111110 11111101 Near end 11111100 5-71 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 976 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected B051/B052 5-72 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 977 500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor Closed Opened 500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated 500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor Locked Not Locked 5-73 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 978 Lower Paper Feed Tray 2 paper feed clutch Clutch Upper Relay Roller Tray 1 vertical transport clutch Clutch Lower Relay Roller Tray 2 vertical transport clutch Clutch Transfer Motor: Half Main motor: 178 mm/s Speed B051/B052 5-74 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 979 Paper Transfer: + Paper transfer bias: + Paper Transfer: – Paper transfer bias: – T/B Cleaning: + Image transfer belt cleaning bias: + Discharge: H Discharge plate power supply: H Discharge: L Discharge plate power supply: L 5-75 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 980 Ozone Fan: Hi Ozone Fan: Low Bridge Cooling Fan: H Bridge Cooling Fan: L PSU Fan Forced Lubricant The following parts are switched on. O/B cleaning contact clutch T/B cleaning solenoid T/B cleaning contact clutch B051/B052 5-76 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 981 500 Fin Stapler Motor Staple Hummer 500 Fin Free Run 1 Stapler Gate Sol 500 Fin Free Run 2 Pos. Roller Sol Feed-out Motor Shift Motor Guide Plate Motor Fin Free Run 1 Fin Free Run 2 5-77 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 982 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest original jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest original jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest original jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest original jam B051/B052 5-78 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 983 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest paper jam Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest paper jam Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest paper jam Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest paper jam 5-79 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 984 SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter. Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes. Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID. B051/B052 5-80 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 985 • Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed from their factory settings. • Do the white level adjustment (! Section 3.14 Standard White Density Adjustment) 6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary adjustments. 5-81 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 986 B051S540.WMF Sensors Code " " — — — " " " " " " " " — — — — " " — Other combinations ": Activated —: Deactivated B051/B052 5-82 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 987 In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the following: Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and switch on. The machine boots from the IC card. Download the new firmware. Others: Replace the appropriate PCB. 5-83 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 988 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Open SP5-824. 6. Touch EXECUTE to start uploading the NVRAM data. 7. Turn off the main switch, and then remove the IC card. B051S136.WMF B051/B052 5-84 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 989 • If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution halts. 5-85 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 990 NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching System Settings. B051S503.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. B051/B052 5-86 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 991 NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching Copier/Document Server Features. B051S504.WMF 3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. 5-87 B051/B052 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 992 In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry. The following SP mode settings will be displayed. • Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1) • Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2) • Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3) • Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4) • Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4) B051/B052 5-88 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 993 If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from the IC card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to ON. BICU Board: SW2 Function ⇒ Machine B052 (32 minute B/W) B051 (24 minute B/W) Type Off: Off: Off: Off: Destination...
  • Page 994 2) Originals with low image coverage ratios 3) Jobs with a low quantity of sets (e.g. 1 or 2 page(s) per job.) Sample: CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright     2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4...
  • Page 995 (concentration of lubricant in the unit is minimized). SOLUTION: During the next service visit for the B051/B052, the firmware should be upgraded and the SP values as identified in table 1 should be changed. The modified firmware changes the rotation time of the PCU assembly to reduce the lubrication used on the OPC.
  • Page 996 Complete the form attached and submit to the address indicated. Be sure to attach the service history, SMC report, internal test patterns and copy count report to the B051/B052 Development Unit Form. UNITS AFFECTED: All B051/B052 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style firmware installed during production. MODEL NAME...
  • Page 997 Tech Service Bulletin No. B051/B052 – 021 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA B051/B052 Development Unit Form TSC is providing a replacement Black Development Unit for B051/B052 copiers that exhibit the defined symptom. The replacement Development Unit shipments are contingent upon proper submittal of the items listed below.
  • Page 998 2) Originals with low image coverage ratios 3) Jobs with a low quantity of sets (e.g. 1 or 2 page(s) per job.) Sample: CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copyright     2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4...
  • Page 999 (concentration of lubricant in the unit is minimized). SOLUTION: During the next service visit for the B051/B052, the firmware should be upgraded and the SP values as identified in Table 1 should be changed. The modified firmware changes the rotation time of the PCU assembly to reduce the lubrication used on the OPC.
  • Page 1000 Complete the form attached and submit to the address indicated. Be sure to attach the service history, SMC report, internal test patterns and copy count report to the B051/B052 Development Unit Form. UNITS AFFECTED: All B051/B052 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style firmware installed during production. MODEL NAME...

This manual is also suitable for:

B052Aficio 1224cAficio 1232c

Table of Contents